Audio PTM-8150 User Manual

RELEASED APRIL 2002

CINEMA

REFERENCE

Mach II

Version 3.46

Installation

Manual

602-610 Mamaroneck Avenue, White Plains, NY, 10605, www .ada-usa.com, 1-800-HD-AUDIO, Fax (914) 946-9620

Safety Instructions & Electrical Warning

115 V

READ INSTRUCTIONS - All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is

operated.

RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS - The operating instructions should be retained for future reference. HEED WARNING - All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS - All operating and use instructions should be followed. WATER AND MOISTURE - The appliance should not be used near water - for example, near a bathtub,

washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.

LOCATION - The appliance should be installed in a stable location. WALL OR CEILING MOUNT - The appliance should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling. VENTILATION - The appliance should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its

proper ventilation. For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings.

HEAT - The appliance should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,

stoves, or other appliances that produce heat.

POWER SOURCES - The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in

the operating instructions or as marked on the appliance.

GROUNDING - Make sure that this unit is always connected to a standard three-prong grounded outlet

(the circular pin is ground). When operating this unit at a higher voltage with a different power cord configuration, consult your dealer for the proper power cord/outlet combination to use ing this unit.

POWER CORD PROTECTION - Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be

walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.

CLEANING - The appliance should be cleaned only with a polishing cloth or a soft dry cloth. Never clean

with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides or other volatile liquids since they may corrode the face plate.

POWER LINES - An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. NONUSE PERIODS - The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left

unused for a long period of time.

OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY - Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled

into the enclosure through openings.

before operat-

The lightning flash with the arrowhead, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user of the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock to persons.

IMPORTANT

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE - The appliance should be serviced by an authorized service center or

• The power supply cord or plug has been damaged; or

• Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or

• The appliance has been exposed to rain; or

• The appliance does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked

• The appliance has been dropped; or the enclosure has been damaged. SERVICING - The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. REPLACE FUSE ONLY AS MARKED.

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT PLUG THIS UNIT INT O ANY OUTLET OR EXTENSION CORD WITHOUT THE ST ANDARD THREE-PRONG CONFIGURA TION, WHERE THE CIRCULAR HOLE IS USED FOR THE GROUND PLUG. ANY UNITS NOT SOLD IN THE UNITED STATES OR CANADA ARE NOT SUPPLIED WITH A POWER CORD. THEREFORE, AN AUDIO DESIGN ASSOCIATES DEALER SHOULD BE CONSULTED BEFORE CONNECTING THIS UNIT TO

THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH A VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH. IN MOST CASES, THIS SWITCH WILL REMAIN IN THE 115V POSITION (SEE PICTURE BELOW), WHICH IS HOW THE UNIT LEAVES THE FACTORY. HOWEVER, IF YOU WANT TO OPERATE THE UNIT IN AN AREA THAT USES THE 230V SETTING, CONSULT YOUR DEALER THE 230V SETTING WOULD BE NEEDED, AUDIO DESIGN ASSOCIATES WILL NOT PROVIDE A POWER CORD FOR THE UNIT. THEREFORE, THE USER MUST CONSULT AN AUTHORIZED DEALER OR ADA TO OBT AIN THE PROPER POWER CORD, AS WELL. MAKE SURE THAT THE VOLTAGE SELEC-

TOR SWITCH IS IN THE PROPER POSITION AND THAT YOU HAVE THE CORRECT POWER CORD BEFORE THIS UNIT IS PLUGGED IN AND OPERATED!

qualified service personnel when:

change in performance; or

instructions. For all other service requirements, the user should contact an Authorized Dealer or Service Center.

WARNING:

CAUTION:

ANY POWER SOURCE.

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH AND REMOVABLE POWER CORD:

BEFORE PLUGGING THE UNIT IN. IN A CASE WHERE

The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user of the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instruction in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Page 1

Contents

Safety Instructions & Electrical Warning....................................................................................... 1

AC Connections ............................................................................................................................... 4

Power Amplifier (& Powered Subwoofer) Connections................................................................ 5

Introduction - Front Panel Controls & Displays ............................................................................ 6

Power On, Mute, Off, & Master Volume Control............................................................................ 7

Input Selector ................................................................................................................................... 8

Record Selector................................................................................................................................ 9

Rear Panel Connections................................................................................................................ 10

Out of the Box Input Configuration ..............................................................................................11

DVD Player Connection .................................................................................................................12

DVD Audio/SACD Player Connection........................................................................................... 13

HDTV DVD Player Connection ......................................................................................................13

DSS Receiver Connection ............................................................................................................. 14

TOS-Link Optical Interconnects & Audio Dropouts.................................................................... 14

DSS Receiver Connection - Coaxial Connection ........................................................................ 15

DVR/PVR Connection .................................................................................................................... 16

DVR/PVR with Digtial Audio & VGA Video Connection .............................................................. 17

VCR Connection............................................................................................................................. 18

Cable or TV Tuner Connection ..................................................................................................... 18

Digital or HDTV Cable/TV Tuner Connection.............................................................................. 19

CD Player Connection ................................................................................................................... 20

CD Player Digital Connections ..................................................................................................... 21

Tuner (Radio) Connection ............................................................................................................. 22

Auxiliary Component Connection ................................................................................................ 22

Multi-Room System Connection................................................................................................... 23

Camcorder Connection ................................................................................................................. 23

Video Game Connection................................................................................................................ 24

Computer Connection ................................................................................................................... 25

Phonograph Connection ............................................................................................................... 25

Laserdisc Player with Internal RF Demodulator ......................................................................... 26

Laserdisc Player with only an AC-3 RF Output........................................................................... 27

Theater (Main) Video Connections ...............................................................................................28

Recording Output........................................................................................................................... 30

Custom Input Configuration ......................................................................................................... 34

Final Input ................................................................................................................................................ 34

Label Inputs ............................................................................................................................................. 35

Audio Input Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 38

Composite Video Input Configuration................................................................................................... 39

S-Video Input Configuration ................................................................................................................... 40

Component Video Input Configuration.................................................................................................. 40

RGB/HDTV/VGA Input Configuration..................................................................................................... 40

HDTV Output Configuration ................................................................................................................... 40

Auxiliary DC Triggers.............................................................................................................................. 42

Turn On Input........................................................................................................................................... 43

LCD Preview Display ............................................................................................................................... 44

Illumination .............................................................................................................................................. 44

Speaker Size Setup 1 ..................................................................................................................... 45

Subwoofer Crossover Point Setup............................................................................................... 47

Multi-Pin Speaker Setup ................................................................................................................ 48

Multi-Pin Input LFE Boost Switch................................................................................................. 49

Speaker Level Setup 2 ................................................................................................................... 50

Balance Presets ............................................................................................................................. 52

Delay Level Setup 3 ....................................................................................................................... 53

Page 2

Bass Setup 4................................................................................................................................... 55

Bass Limiter ............................................................................................................................................. 55

THX Ultra Setup 5........................................................................................................................... 56

Boundary Gain Control (BGC)................................................................................................................ 56

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA) ............................................................................................................. 56

DTS LFE Settings ........................................................................................................................... 57

DTS LFE Adjustment Enable .................................................................................................................. 57

DTS LFE Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 57

Tone Controls................................................................................................................................. 58

Tone Presets - Out of the Box ................................................................................................................ 58

Recalling Tone Presets ........................................................................................................................... 59

Speaker Groups ....................................................................................................................................... 60

Treble Group A......................................................................................................................................... 61

Bass Group A........................................................................................................................................... 61

Treble Group B......................................................................................................................................... 61

Bass Group B........................................................................................................................................... 62

Storing Tone Presets............................................................................................................................... 62

Volume Setups ............................................................................................................................... 63

Storing Volume Presets .......................................................................................................................... 63

Recalling Volume Presets....................................................................................................................... 63

Turn-On Volume Level Setup ................................................................................................................. 63

Maximum Volume Level .......................................................................................................................... 64

Analog Gain ............................................................................................................................................. 64

Channel Volume Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 65

Solo Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 65

RS-232 Control Options................................................................................................................. 66

ADA Bus Data Port .................................................................................................................................. 66

ISO-232 ADA Bus to RS-232 Wired I/O Device ......................................................................................66

RS-232 Connection & Settings ............................................................................................................... 66

RS-232 Connection with Other ADA Bus Systems/Components ........................................................ 67

IRT-232 IR Transceiver to RS-232 Wireless I/O Device ........................................................................ 68

PC Setup & Control Software ................................................................................................................. 68

External IR Receiver Options ................................................................................................................. 69

Baud Rate Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 71

IR Transceiver (Front Panel) Settings.................................................................................................... 72

Address Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 72

Output Channel Indicator Lamps ................................................................................................. 74

Mode Selection............................................................................................................................... 75

Multi-Channel Formats .................................................................................................................. 76

Cinema Modes & Indicator Lamps ............................................................................................... 77

Two Channel Modes & Indicator Lamps ...................................................................................... 80

Proprietary Two Channel ADA Modes.......................................................................................... 85

Fun Modes ...................................................................................................................................... 87

THX Enhancements ....................................................................................................................... 89

Dynamic Range .............................................................................................................................. 91

Default Modes................................................................................................................................. 92

User Modes..................................................................................................................................... 94

Appendix A - Out Of The Box Settings Overview........................................................................ 96

Appendix B - Custom Setup Work Sheet..................................................................................... 97

Appendix C - Resetting Factory Defaults .................................................................................... 98

Appendix D - Master Reset Power Button (Vacation Switch) .................................................... 99

Appendix E - Cinema Reference Mach II PC Program.............................................................. 100

Appendix F - Cinema Reference Mach II Hex Codes ................................................................ 107

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Confidential Unpublished W orks. © Copyright 1992-2002, Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm, Ltd. ©Lucasfilm Ltd. & TM. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. used under authorization. Manufactured under license from DTS Technology, LLC. DTS Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS Technology LLC. ©2002, Audio Design Associates, Inc. All rights reserved. Technical data and information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Page 3

AC Connections

Before Y ou Begin

AC Connection

Before you plug your Cinema Reference into an AC outlet, make certain that the voltage selector switch is set to the proper position. The Cinema Reference’s safety fuse is set to match the voltage selector’s setting. There are two voltage selector switches and two safety fuse holders. When viewing the Cinema Reference from the front, the Main Switch/Fuse are on the units left side. The VGA Switch/ Fuse are located on the units rear panel.

If you are altering the Voltage Selector Switches, you will also most likely need to change the safety fuses.

AC Connection

For customers who are using the U.S. standard AC receptacle, you will use the EIC AC Power Cord provided with the Cinema Reference Mach II. Simply plug this AC cord into an operative AC outlet. For customers who are using a non-U.S. standard AC receptacle, you will need to acquire an EIC AC Power Cord with the appropriate receptacle connector. ADA only provides AC Power Cords with the U.S. standard AC prongs.

As you remove the Cinema Reference Mach II from its packaging, inspect the condition of the component prior to proceeding with the following steps for AC connection. In the event that the Cinema Reference Mach II appears to have suffered cosmetic damage due to shipping, please contact your Authorized ADA Dealer immediately and do not proceed to plug the unit into an AC outlet.

Caution

Before plugging your Cinema Reference Mach II into an AC outlet, check the Voltage Selector Switch settings (the Main Switch and Fuse holder is located on the units left side when looking at the Cinema Reference from the front and the VGA Switch and Fuse holder is located on the units back panel) and make certain that the selector is set to your appropriate voltage position. For U.S. customers, this setting should be 115V. For international customers, you may need to set this switch to 230V.

Fuse Values

For U.S. customers or international customers also operating on a 1 15V AC system, the Main fuse value of the Cinema Reference Mach II should be a 1 Amp Slow Blow fuse. For international customers operating on a 230V AC system, the Main fuse value should be 1/2 Amp Slow Blow . The safety Main fuse is located next to the Voltage selector switch on the Cinema Reference’s left side (when viewing it from the front.) The VGA fuse is located on the rear panel. For systems operating at 115V AC, the fuse value is 2/10 Amp Slow Blow. For systems operating at 230V AC, the VGA fuse value is 1/10 Amp Slow Blow.

Page 4

1

2

1

VGA•RGB•HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

4

6

L

2

3

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

5

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. © 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

OSD

L

6

R

MAIN 2

VGASWITCHER

VGA•RGBHV•HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

1

41

3

2

L

C

MAIN

RS

OPTICAL INPUTS

R

SUBSBR

123

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

Y

3

OUTPUT

P

Y

4

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

B

123

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

PR

4

AC VOLTAGE

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus® 1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

115 V

12

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET™

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L'Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

AVERTISSEMENT!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Plug into Cinema Reference

Plug into an AC Outlet

Power Amplifier (& Powered Subwoofer) Connections

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

Audio Connections

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Audio Outputs are clearly marked in a white field on the back of the

ADA strongly suggests not using directional interconnects that lift the grounds. This diagram

unit. includes ADA’s PTM-8150 Eight Channel Power Amplifier. While you may decide to vary the input arrangement if you are using a PTM-8150, the following input arrangement will cause the amplifier ’s front panel LED display to spread outward from Channel 4, the center channel speaker. If you are using a self-powered subwoofer, you will connect the Cinema Reference’s SUB Output directly to the subwoofer . If you are using a self powered subwoofer with the PTM-8150, you may opt to “Y” split the SUB output so as to illuminate channel eight of the PTM-8150.

Amplifier AC Connections

The Cinema Reference Mach II incorporates a switched AC outlet which is rated at 10 Amps. This is powerful enough for ADA ’s PTM-8150 or PTM-6150 Power Amplifiers. Several other power amplifiers could also be plugged directly into this switched AC outlet. However, if the power amplifier is going to draw more than 10 Amps (such as ADA ’s MP A-501 Five Channel THX High-Power Amplifier), you will want to avoid using this switched AC outlet. To connect the power amplifier to the Cinema Reference Mach II, you will need to use an EIC Male to EIC Female AC Cord. These AC cords are also used for computers and computer monitors and are available in stores that support computer and AC products.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

5

3

1

6

4

2

L

3

2

1

R

PTM-8150

E

IGHT CHANNEL POWER AMPLIFIER

OUTPUT

2-16

Ω

+-

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

S

BL

INPUT

47K

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

ΩCH

1

R

INPUT

47K

Ω CH

OUTPUT

2-16

Ω

+-

5

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

REC

L

1

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

MAIN 2

OSD

6

2

3

MAIN

RS

67 5

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

41

3

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

8

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

P

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

4

123

3

Y

LS

OUTPUT

2-16

INPUT

47K

Ω

+-

2

RS

Ω CH

6

INPUT

47K

ΩCH

OUTPUT

2-16

Ω

+-

OUTPUT

2-16

INPUT

47K

Ω

BR

Ω CH

INPUT

47K

+-

S

ΩCH

3

OUTPUT

2-16

Ω

+-

7

CAUTION! DO NOT SHORT OUTPUTS!

Y

4

OUTPUT

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

P

B

P

123

2-16

INPUT 47K

PR

4

Ω

+-

4

S

Ω CH

8

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

CL

INPUT

47K

ΩCH

OUTPUT

2-16

+-

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

DC

10A~ Max Switched

1500W POWER

115 V~/60 Hz • 230 V~/50 Hz

CAUTION:

DISCONNECT SUPPLY

CORD BEFORE

SERVICING.

Ω

ATTENTION:

DEBRANCHER AVANT

LE DEPANNAGE.

WARNING!

RISK OF HAZARDOUS

ENERGY!

MAKE PROPER SPEAKER

CONNECTIONS.

AVERTISSEMENT! ENERGIE ELECTRIQUE DANGEREUSE! FAIRE DES CONNEXIONS PROPRES POUR

L'HAUTPARLEUR. VOIR LA NOTICE

DE FONCTIONNEMENT.

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH OME THEATER CONTROLLER

H

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Plug into Cinema Reference

EIC Male to EIC Female Power Cord

REPLACE

WITH SAME

VALUE FUSE 10A S.B.~115V 5A S.B.~230V

VOLTAGE

SWITCH

230 V~ 115 V~

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

115 V

II

115 V

Plug into

PTM-8150 or

another power

amplifier.

Sub Output To Power Amplifier For Passive Subs

Or Sub Output To Powered Subwoofer

Page 5

Introduction - Front Panel Controls & Displays

Overview

The Cinema Reference Mach II is factory set for optimum operation. This section details the front panel features of the Cinema Reference. All component functions can be operated through the five control knobs located on the units front panel. The front panel displays are also explained in this section.

Active Incoming Channels

Mode

Indicator

Lamps

Welcome

The Cinema Reference Mach II is the world’s most advanced audio video surround sound preamplifier. The Box” for optimum operation. While it is designed to be easy to setup and operate, ADA strongly recommends spending some time familiarizing yourself with the units many functions and features. For those who wish to customize their home theater system, the Cinema Reference Mach II is also equipped to be configured to operate ideally in almost any environment and with many varying source components. While the connection of components and accessories are discussed in the following sections, this area will explain the front panel features and basic operation commands of the Cinema Reference Mach II’s front panel. The text found in italic type in this manual’s margins will act as a quick reference when reviewing these materials.

Active

Output

Channels

SELECT SERIES

Two-Line

Back-Lit LCD

Status Display

It is also configured “Out Of

Color

LCD Preview

Display

DVD DISC 1

ALL -24.0 DB

U

M

L

O

E

Cinema Reference MACH II

Master

Reset

Switch

U

P

T

N

I

Input

Selector

D

O

E

M

Mode

Selector

V

MADE IN U.S.A.

Volume Control

& On/Off

N

A

E

H

L

C

Channel Selector

O

R

C

E

D

R

Record

Selector

LCD Preview

Monitor

Contrast Control

Features

The Cinema Reference Mach II acts as both an input selector and surround sound decoder. It is capable of decoding Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital (AC-3), and DTS encoded formats and also provide Lucasfilm THX Ultra 2 enhancements and filters. While the Cinema Reference Mach II can automatically detect between Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, and Dolby Digital/Dolby Pro Logic (both decoding formats are used when playing two-channel encoded DVD discs {typically older movies available on DVD that are not mixed in six channels}), the option to engage either full THX enhancements or only THX Re-EQ must be manually set on the Cinema Reference Mach II. The Cinema Reference also provides several additional modes ideal for music playback. There are additional settings that permit the Cinema Reference Mach II to also operate in home theaters where a full eight channel speaker array may only be partially implemented (i.e. no back surround and/or no center channel). Furthermore, the Cinema Reference Mach II also permits each channel to be set to its own volume level with respect to all other channels as well as have its own delay setting. These features and more are discussed in the upcoming sections.

Page 6

Power On, Mute, Off, & Master Volume Control

When the Cinema Reference is off, turning any knob or pushing any knob other than the Volume knob will cause the Cinema Reference’s center LCD display to indicate:

Power On

Press the Cinema Reference’s

PUSH VOLUME

FOR POWER ON

To turn on the Cinema Reference, providing the unit is not in Mute, press the Volume knob once. Pressing of the Volume knob performs only three functions.

Volume knob to engage power on.

Front Plate

If the unit is off, pressing it will turn it on. If the unit is on, pressing it once will engage Mute. If the unit is in Mute, pressing it again will turn it off.

(To regain the audio (exit Mute), turn the Volume knob).

i

s

a

e

R

&

r

e

w

o

L

V

O

V

o

l

u

m

U

M

L

E

e

Once the Cinema Reference is on, turning the V olume knob will only raise or lower the system’s volume level. This is considered the Master V olume Control as it will adjust all eight channels of volume, maintaining the balance of levels that are preset between channels.

Press Knob

To Turn On

Press Knob

Once To Mute

Press Knob

Twice For Off

Side View

Mute

While the Cinema Reference is on, pressing it’s Volume knob once will mute all channels.

Power Off

While the Cinema Reference is in Mute, pressing the Volume knob a second time will turn the Cinema Reference off.

Chassis Side

Un-Mute

While the Cinema Reference is in Mute, turning the volume knob, will regain audio.

Power On/Off Via AC Control

If the Cinema Reference is on when it is unplugged or when power is removed through the use of an AC Controller, it will also automatically turn back on when power is restored.

Page 7

Input Selector

e

l

c

e

t

S

o

T

n

r

o

u

C

T

m

I

A

n

o

p

U

P

N

t

h

n

e

n

e

t

r

T

Front View

1. Dial In New Input

Turn the Input Selector knob until the second line of the LCD display reads the component you wish to select. As you turn the knob, you will notice that the top line of the display still indicates the current source in play. Also, this component is still being routed and processed by the Cinema Reference.

2. Engage New Input

Once the second line of the display indicates the next component you wish to access, press the Input Selector knob to engage this input. This method permits you to select an input without switching all of the inputs you are scrolling through.

Press Knob

T o Activate

The New

Component

Selection

The Cinema Reference Mach II permits you to scroll to the next input without having all of the components you are passing actively process through the Cinema Reference Mach II. This prevents the clicking that is commonly associated with changing TV channels up and down. To best access another component from the front of the Cinema Reference, turn the Input Selector knob. As you turn this knob, you will notice that the top row of the LCD display will not change, still indicating the current component in use (in this example, DVD PLAYER 1). The second line of the LCD display will advance through the input names until the desired component is displayed.

DVD PLAYER 1

ALL -24.0 DB

DVD PLAYER 1

DSS 2

DVD PLAYER 1 DVR/PVR 3

DVD PLAYER 1

VCR 4

DVD PLAYER 1

CABLE/TV 5

Front Plate

Once the desired component is displayed on the LCD’s second row, press the Input Selector knob to engage that component. The display will then return to read the new selection (i.e. DSS) along with the Volume Level.

Page 8

Side View

CABLE/TV 5

ALL -24.0 DB

Chassis Side

Side View

Press Knob

To Activate

The New

Component

Selection

Chassis Side

Front Plate

Record Selector

The Cinema Reference Mach II incorporates a record selector that operates independently from the actual source component selected for the home theater room. This record selector can be used in several ways.

1 Use the Record Selector to send audio and video signals from a particular component to a recording device (i.e. VCR)

2 Use the Record Selector to send a video signals to a second monitor or TV set. Ideal for the sports fanatic, this option would permit a second TV to display a broadcast from a DSS receiver , TV tuner, or VCR TV tuner, while the primary viewing display would be set to a particular channel from another component.

3 Use the Record Selector to determine the image inserted into a TV’s PIP (Picture In Picture). This would provide the same effect as described in option 2 (above) using the PIP function in place of a second TV or monitor.

4 Use the Record Selector to send the audio and video signal of a particular device to a whole-house multi-room audio video system. This setup would cause the Record Selector to act as a separate zone from the actual home theater.

Please note, that the Record audio output of the Cinema Reference Mach II is a pure analog output. There is no analog-todigital or digital-to-analog conversion taking place in this circuit. This preserves the audio quality for those who opt to use the Record output to pass audio to a premium two-channel audio system. If a component is connected to a digital input on the Cinema Reference Mach II, a special setup will need to be done in order for the unit to play through the record output. This is discussed under Recording Connections.

Record Selector Functions

To determine what component the Record Selector is currently set to, press the Record Selector knob. The display will read as follows where the second line of the display indicates the component selected.

RECORD TAKEN

DVD PLAYER 1

e

l

c

e

t

S

o

T

n

r

d

r

u

o

T

c

e

R

E

R

A

n

o

R

t

h

p

o

e

n

r

e

n

t

D

o

m

C

O

C

Front View

The Record Selector operates independently from the main output providing the ability to record, view, or play (in another room) a component other than the one selected in the home theater.

To determine which device is currently selected, press the Record Selector knob. To change components:

1. Dial In New Device

Turn the Record Selector knob until the second line of the LCD display reads the component you wish to select.

2. Engage New Device

Once the second line of the display indicates the next component you wish to access, press the Record knob to engage this input.

RECORD INPUT

DSS RECORD15

To select another source component, turn the Record Selector knob until the new component appears in the display.

Then press the Record Selector knob to engage this device.

Page 9

Rear Panel Connections

Composite Video

Inputs (8)

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

6

L

3

R

7

8

4

AUDIO INPUTS

1

4

2

L

2

1

R

Analog Audio

Inputs (8)

S-Video

Inputs (4)

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

REC

OSD

L

5

R

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

6

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

VIDEO OUT

1

2

DVD Audio/SACD

Input (1)

Component Video

Inputs (3)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

1

41

3

2

L

MAIN

R

RS

POINTS

Y

C

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

1

2

3

Digital Audio

Optical TOS-Link

Inputs (4)

HDTV¥RGBHV¥VGA

Inputs (4)

VGASWITCHER

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

123

4

RECORD

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

Digital Audio

Coaxial

Inputs (4)

AC VOLTAGE

OUT

Serial Data

O

UT

I

N

115 V

12

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

10 Amp

Switched

AC Outlet

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

HDTV-RGBHV

Processed

Video Output

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

6

L

3

R

7

8

AUDIO INPUTS

1

4

2

L

2

1

R

Main Composite

Video Outputs (2)

Record

Composite

Video Output

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

REC

OSD

L

5

R

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

6

R

4

VIDEO OUT

1

2

Main Composite

Video Output

with On-Screen

Display (1)

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

HDTV-RGBHV

Un-Processed

Video Output

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

1

41

3

2

L

MAIN

R

RS

POINTS

Y

C

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

1

2

Main S-Video

Output (1)

Record S-Video

Output

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Y

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

3

OUTPUT

B

P

Y

3

PR

123

4

Main Eight

Channel Audio

Output (7.1)

Component

Video

Output

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

OUT

O

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

RECORD

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

G

ND

ADA Bus

Record

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

Data

Port

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Triggers (2)

Audio

Output

II

Voltage

Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Low

Page 10

Out of the Box Input Configuration

The Cinema Reference Mach II is an incredibly flexible home theater controller that can accommodate a wide array of components. For easy and quick setup, one can use the “Out of the Box” input configurations shown on the following pages. One can also elect to do a completely “Custom” input configuration or a combination of “Out of the Box” and “Custom” input configurations.

The “Out of the Box” input configuration is easy to follow and offers connection of as many as 15 components without adjustment of the Cinema Reference’s input configurations (providing that the sources have the appropriate outputs and that the TV has at least an S-Video input). Below is a chart showing the Cinema Reference’s 20 “input labels” and the assignment of the A/V jacks on the rear panel of the unit. While there are 20 available input labels, the Out of the Box setup utilizes only the first fifteen labels were the remaining five are record options.

INPUT

INPUT LABEL

#

1 DVD PLAYER DIGITAL 1 - 1111S-VIDEO 2 DSS OPTICAL 2 DIGITAL 2 2222S-VIDEO 3 DVR/PVR ANALOG 3 OPTICAL 3 3 3 - 3 S-VIDEO 4 VC R ANALOG 4 - 4 4 - - COMPOSITE 5 CABLE/TV ANALOG 5 OPTICAL 4 5 - - 4 COMPOSITE 6 CD PLAYER ANALOG 6 OPTICAL 1 ----COMPOSITE 7 TUNER ANALOG 7 - ----COMPOSITE 8 AUXILIARY ANALOG 8 - 8 - - - COMPOSITE

9 DVD AUDIO MULTI-PIN - 1111COMPOSITE 1 0 MULTI-ROOM ANALOG 2 - ----COMPOSITE 1 1 CAMCORDER ANALOG 1 - 7 - - - COMPOSITE 1 2 VIDEO GAME DIGITAL 3 OPTICAL 1 6 - 3 - COMPOSITE 1 3 COMPUTER DIGITAL 4 OPTICAL 1 ---1RGB 1 4 LASERDISC OPTICAL 1 - 8 - - - COMPOSITE 1 5 LASER AC3 DIGITAL 2 - 8 - - - COMPOSITE 1 6 PHONOGRPH ANALOG 1 - ----COMPOSITE 1 7 DSS RECORD ANALOG 2 - 2222COMPOSITE 1 8 DVR RECORD ANALOG 3 - 3 3 - 3 COMPOSITE 1 9 TV RECORD ANALOG 5 - 5 - - 4 COMPOSITE 2 0 CD RECORD ANALOG 6 - ----COMPOSITE

AUDIO

INPUT

ALTERNATE

AUDIO INPUT

COMPOSITE

VIDEO

INPUT

S-VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT

RGB (HV)

INPUT

HDTV

CONVERSION

OUTPUT

Please note, that the Out of the Box input configuration is designed to maximize the home theater experience. Because only analog audio connections play through the record output, the components that are connected digitally (DVD, DSS) will not provide audio through the record output. This can be changed and is discussed in the Record Connection section of this manual.

“Custom” input configuration permits any input label to be renamed to best suit the actual system. For example, the input label DSS could be changed to read SATELLITE. Also, each input label can be assigned to any of the eight analog or eight digital audio inputs, as they do not have to be fixed to the A/V jacks that are assigned in the Out of the Box setup. The same is true for the composite video, SVideo, component video, and RGB video inputs. This flexibility permits you to maximize the Cinema Reference Mach II’s A/V jacks to accommodate a wide assortment of components. Lastly, the Cinema Reference features an option called Final Input. Here, you can reduce the number of input labels that are displayed. For example, if you are only connecting six components to the Cinema Reference Mach II, you could set the final input to CD PLA YER 6. After this adjustment, turning the input knob will only display the first six inputs. As such, combining the Final Input feature with the ability to rename input labels and reassign A/V jacks to any input label, one has the ability to completely customize a Cinema Reference Mach II to perfectly match any system. And should a component be added at some later time, the final input can be opened back up to seven (or more) to accommodate connection of the new devices. To learn more about “Custom” input configuration of the Cinema Reference Mach II, skip forward to this section. To proceed with the Out of the Box setup, follow the instructions on the following pages.

Page 11

DVD Player Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial audio output of the DVD player as most DVD players have this type of RCA jack.

DVD Player

PCM/AC-3/DTS

Digital Out

Video

Out

Video Cable

(When driving the TV with S-Video or component video, this cable is still required to drive the Cinema Reference’s LCD display.

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

1

2

VIDEO INPUTS

L

1

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

3

5

4

6

2

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

REC

2

OSD

L

5

6

R

S-Video

Out

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

1

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

R

S-Video Cable

(Primary Video Connection providing TV has S-Video Input)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

111

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

RS

MAIN

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

1

41

2

L

C

OPTICAL INPUTS

R

SUBSBR

123

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

P

B

Y

123

4

1

Component Video Output

Y Cr Cb

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

R

4

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

L

R

DATA PORT

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

OUT

Serial Data

O

UT

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

Component Video

(Optional video connection providing that TV has component video inputs. If TV has component video, S-Video Input #1 can be used for an alternate component.

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

115 V

(This cable carries Dolby Digital (AC-3) and DTS 6 channel audio from

DVDs and standard 2 channel digital audio from CDs.)

The above illustration shows composite video, S-Video, and component video connections. You may not require all of these connections and will need to determine this based on the input connections on your TV, projector, or line-doubling device.

Composite Video

ADA suggests connecting the composite video signal from the DVD player to the Cinema Reference Mach II. Because the Cinema Reference’s front panel preview monitor only displays a composite video signal, it will be necessary to use this connection regardless if your display device is capable of showing S-Video or Component Video.

S-Video

S-Video offers superior image resolution than composite video. Most home theater displays, either TV or projector, offer an S-Video input.

Component Video

Component video is superior to S-Video. While most TVs do not feature a component video input, most projectors or line-doublers do. This connection is only useful if your TV or projector feature a component video input.

Digital Output

Page 12

DVD Audio/SACD Player Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration also has provisions for a DVD Player that is capable of playing DVD Audio and/or SACD. These multi-channel high-resolution discs are designed to offer superior sound quality. Because of concerns regarding copy-protection, the decoding of the material actually takes place in the DVD player. For this reason, DVD Audio and SACD players feature six channel analog audio outputs which are labeled left, center, right, left surround, right surround and subwoofer.

DVD Player with DVD Audio and/or SACD Output

PCM/AC-3/DTS

Digital Out

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

2

L

1

R

7

4

6

8

L

2

3

R

AUDIO INPUTS

Video

Out

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

4

5

R

REC

OSD

6

S-Video

Out

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2341

REC

L

78

R

Multi-Channel Output

LCRLSRS

S-VIDEO INPUTS

L

SBL LS

MAIN

R

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

C

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

SUBSBR

123

Component Video Output

Sub

Y Cr Cb

6 Channel RCA to DB-25 Multi-Channel Audio Cable

(Not included with Cinema Referenceand typically not included with DVD Player)

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

ADA NET“

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

P

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

PR

12VDC OUT

DATA PORT

100mA Max Per

Serial Data

DC 1

DC 2

ADA Bus¤

1- 2+

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

Y

3

OUTPUT

Y

4

HDTV DVD Player Connection

HDTV DVD Player

PCM/AC-3/DTS

Digital Out

Video Cable

(When driving the TV with S-Video or component video, this cable is still required to drive the Cinema Reference’s LCD display.

1

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

2

1

R

(This cable carries Dolby Digital (AC-3) and DTS 6 channel audio from

DVDs and standard 2 channel digital audio from CDs.)

Video

Out

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

5

7

1

6

8

2

L

3

4

5

R

AUDIO INPUTS

S-Video

Out

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2341

REC

OSD

L

78

6

R

Digital Output

S-Video Cable

(Primary Video Connection providing TV has S-Video Input)

HDTV Video

1

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

1

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

2

L

R

SUBSBR

C

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

3

Y

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

UTPUT

P

B

P

123

1

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

R

RECORD

OUT

L

R

12VDC OUT

DATA PORT

100mA Max Per

Serial Data

DC 1

ADA Bus¤

1- 2+

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

Y

O

4

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

HD VGA Output

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ADA NET“

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

The Cinema Reference Mach II features a DB-25 multi-pin connection for the six channel high-resolution audio input. This standardized jack permits connection to a DVD or SACD player’s using a multi-channel RCA (male) to DB-25 (male) interconnect cable. This cable is readily available by several cable manufacturers.

II

To listen to DVD Audio or SACD, select the DVD AUDIO 9 input label. To view normal

Side

115 V

DVDs, return to the DVD PLAYER 1 input label.

The Out of the Box input configuration also has provisions for a DVD Player that is capable of playing HDTV DVDs. These DVDs provide better video resolution than standard DVDs. HDTV DVD players feature a 15-pin HD/VGA output which is then connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s HDTV input #1.

Please note, while the diagram does not show the component video connection as illustrated on the previous page, you will

II

still want to make these connections to provide the best

Voltage

video resolution for standard

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

DVDs. At the time of this print-

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

ing, HDTV DVD players are

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

not yet available and as such, ADA cannot confirm that these players will internally up-convert component video to VGA.

Page 13

DSS Receiver Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a DSS receiver is set to use the optical digital audio output of the DSS receiver as most DSS receivers have this type of TOS-Link jack. In the event your DSS receiver features a digital audio coaxial jack, you may wish to use this connection instead of the optical connection. Coaxial connections are better than optical connections, especially when basic optical interconnects are all that are available.

DSS/SATELLITE

Opitcal Digital

Audio Out

Video

Out

Video Cable

(When driving the TV with S-Video or component video, this cable is still required to drive the Cinema Reference’s LCD display.

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

2

1

2

VIDEO INPUTS

L

1

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

3

5

4

6

2

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

REC

2

OSD

L

5

6

R

S-Video

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

R

Output

S-Video Cable (Primary Video)

2

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

41

3

L

MAIN

R

RS

HDTV Video (Optional)

(You must connect this cable to a TV, linedoubler, or projector that is capable of processing HDTV (VGA) video)

2

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

C

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

SUBSBR

123

2

HD VGA Output

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

R

4

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

123

4

ADA NET“

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

115 V

TOS-Link Optical Digital Interconnect

TOS-Link Optical Interconnects & Audio Dropouts

The issue regarding TOS-Link optical interconnects stems from the manner in which they are manufactured. The most basic TOS-Link cables have the fiber optic line cut with a hot wire. Cutting the fiber optic line in this manner forms a smooth reflective surface. It is this reflective surface which causes digital data, in the form of light, to reflect off of the optical receiver, and in essence, back feed into the TOS-Link interconnect. As such, the flow of light (the flow of digital data) is then interrupted. This will cause audio dropouts during playback.

When selecting a TOS-Link interconnect, ADA strongly suggests using the very best cable available. T ypically , these cables of fer some type of frosted tip which greatly reduces the reflective interference. The very best TOS-Link interconnects provide convex tips which eliminate reflective interference.

If your DSS receiver features a digital coaxial audio output and you wish to use this type of interconnect, follow the instructions as outlined on the next page.

Page 14

DSS Receiver Connection - Coaxial Connection

DSS/SATELLITE

Digital

Audio Out

Video

Out

Video Cable

(When driving the TV with S-Video or component video, this cable is still required to drive the Cinema Reference’s LCD display.

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

2

1

2

1

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

4

6

L

2

3

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

REC

2

OSD

L

5

6

R

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MAIN 2

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-Video

Output

S-Video Cable (Primary Video)

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

2

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

HD VGA Output

HDTV Video (Optional)

(You must connect this cable to a TV, linedoubler, or projector that is capable of processing HDTV (VGA) video)

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B.

230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

PR

4

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

Y

P

3

OUTPUT

B

P

Y

123

4

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

2

Coaxial Digital Interconnect

In the event that the DSS receiver features a coaxial digital audio output which you intend to use instead of the TOS-Link output, you will need to connect a 75Ω interconnect to Digital Input #2. When doing this, you will also need to change the audio jack assigned to the DSS input label. To do this:

1 Turn the input knob until display’s second line reads DSS 2 and then press the Input knob. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads DIGITAL 2.

At this time, you have reassigned the DSS 2 input label from tracking the Optical 2 input to the Digital 2 input.

Please note that regardless of which wiring option you choose to use when connecting a DSS receiver to the Cinema Reference Mach II, you may still need to make adjustments to the DSS receiver. As many DSS receivers have multiple audio output setup configurations, ADA strongly suggests reviewing the DSS manual to insure proper setup.

Page 15

DVR/PVR Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a DVR (Digital Video Recorder) are sometimes called PVRs (Personal Video Recorders). There are several different models available and the diagram below shows connection of the most basic type of models.

These units feature analog audio outputs along with both composite video and S-Video outputs. The diagram to the right details the connection of more advanced models that in addition to the outputs found on standard models, also include a digital audio output as well as a VGA video output. Because the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box setup is designed for easy connection of all types of DVRs, the diagram below shows the more basic connection. To alter the Cinema Reference’s input configuration for DVR’s with digital audio, follow the instructions on the next page.

DVR / PVR

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

3

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

3

1

R

3

Stereo

Video

Out

Video Cable

(When driving the TV with S-Video or component video, this cable is still required to drive the Cinema Reference’s LCD display.

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

VIDEO OUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

1

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

MAIN 2

2

OSD

L

5

R

6

78

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

REC

L

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

6

2

3

S-Video

Output

3

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

S-Video Cable (Primary Video)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

41

2

C

SUBSBR

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL INPUTS

1

L

R

INPUTS

2

Y

3

Y

3

4

O

UTPUT

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

P

123

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

DVRs are designed to record material that is being broadcast (either off-air TV, cable TV, or DSS TV) and may require an output from a broadcast tuner to permit this recording function. Some units feature an internal tuning device of their own. As such, you may be able to record into the DVR while you watch something else. To maximize the connectivity of your DVR and the Cinema Reference Mach II, you will need to consult with the DVR’s instruction manual regarding connecting other devices to the DVR. Please note, that you may wish to connect some components to both the DVR and the Cinema Reference.

Page 16

DVR/PVR with Digtial Audio & VGA Video Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a DVR provides for analog audio connections. This configuration, in addition to composite video and S-Video, is also setup for VGA video. As such, if you are using an advanced DVR, one that also features a VGA video output (i.e. replay tv 4000), you can connect this output to the Cinema Reference’s #3 VGA input. As with other components that feature a VGA output, this connection is only useful if your display device features a VGA/HDTV input.

DVR/PVR with Digital Audio & VGA Video

Stereo

Opitcal Digital

Audio Out

RL

Video Cable

(This cable is required to drive the LCD display.)

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

3

1

2

1

VIDEO INPUTS

3

4

L

2

R

5

6

L

3

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

7

2

8

4

Audio Out

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

OSD

L

5

R

6

L

78

R

Video

Out

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

3

RS

S-Video

Output

41

L

MAIN

R

S-Video Cable (Primary Video)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

C

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

SUBSBR

123

HD VGA Output

HDTV Video (Optional)

3

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

R

4

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

123

4

3

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

MADE IN U.S.A.

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

DO NOT OPEN

NE PAS OUVRIR

WARNING!

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Regardless of whether your display device features a VGA/HDTV input, the advanced DVRs also offer a digital audio output that will improve your entertainment experience. Because the Out of the Box configuration defaults to the Analog 3 input, you will first need to reassign the DVR/PVR input label to a digital audio jack. At the time of this printing, advanced DVRs feature a TOS-Link optical digital connection which should be connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Optical Input #3. To reassign the DVR/PVR input label to track the digital input, follow the steps below.

1 Turn the input knob until display’s second line reads DVR/PVR 3 and then press the Input

knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads OPTICAL 3.

At this time, you have reassigned the DVR/PVR 3 input label from tracking the Analog 3 input to the Optical 3 input.

Please note that when using a TOS-Link interconnect, ADA strongly suggests using the very best interconnect available to prevent audio dropouts.

Page 17

VCR Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a VCR permits for both composite and S-Video as well as right and left analog audio. Use inputs number 4.

VCR

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

1

R

Stereo

Video

Out

Video Cable

(When driving the TV with S-Video or component video, this cable is still required to drive the Cinema Reference’s LCD display.

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

VIDEO OUT

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A

1

2

5

REC

OSD

L

6

R

5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

R

5

7

6

8

L

4

2

3

4

R

4

AUDIO INPUTS

S-Video

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

RS

Output

S-Video Cable (Primary Video)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

4

Y

P

1

41

2

L

C

MAIN

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

PR

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

Y

3

OUTPUT

P

Y

4

DC 1 1- 2+

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

Cable or TV Tuner Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Cable TV box or TV tuner permits for both composite and right and left analog audio. Use inputs number 5. For advanced tuners, see the next page.

CABLE/TV TUNER

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

1

R

Stereo

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

3

5

4

6

2

3

Video

Out

Video Cable

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

7

1

REC

8

2

L

5

R

5

AUDIO INPUTS

OSD

L

4

5

6

R

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

R

3

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

P

B

P

123

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

R

4

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

Y

3

O

UTPUT

Y

4

DC 1 1- 2+

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

115 V

Page 18

1

2

3

4

3

5

6

4

7

8

5

1

2

6

REC

OSD

78

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

123

4

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

DATA PORT

Serial Data

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC 2 1- 2+

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

1

2

3

OPTICAL INPUTS

MAIN 2

3

41

S-VIDEO INPUTS

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

REC

SBL LS

RS

L

R

C

SUBSBR

MAIN

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

L

R

RECORD

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

P

B

P

R

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

O

UTPUT

1

2

3

113

2514

POINTS

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

II

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

ADA NET“

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

2341

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

+10dB

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

0dB

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

115 V

HDTV CABLE/TV TUNER

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Video

Out

Opitcal Digital

Audio Out

5

HD VGA Output

HDTV Video

4

Video Cable

(This cable is required to drive the LCD display.)

Digital or HDTV Cable/TV Tuner Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for Cable/TV tuners provides for analog audio connections along with composite video. If you are using a HDTV tuner instead of a cable TV tuner, you will need to alternate the audio input configuration for the CABLE/TV 5 input label. This input label is also setup Out of the Box for a VGA/HDTV input on VGA input #4. To permit the Cinema Reference Mach II to play digital audio, you will need to connect a TOS-Link interconnect between your tuning device and the Cinema Reference’s #4 optical input.

To reassign the audio input, follow these steps.

At this time, you have reassigned the CABLE/TV 5 input label from tracking the Analog 5 input to the Optical 4 input.

Please note that when using a TOS-Link interconnect, ADA strongly suggests using the very best interconnect available to prevent audio dropouts.

1 Turn the input knob until display’s second line reads CABLE/TV 5 and then press the Input

knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads OPTICAL 4.

Page 19

CD Player Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for CD Player provides for analog audio connections. Connect your line-level audio outputs from your CD player to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Analog Audio input #6.

CD PLAYER

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround

1

2

L

1

R

7

8

L

6

4

R

6

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

4

6

2

3

EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

OSD

6

S-VIDEO INPUTS

REC

L

78

R

SBL LS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

41

3

2

C

SUBSBR

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL INPUTS

1

L

MAIN

R

RS

INPUTS

2

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

123

3

4

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

If you are using a CD Player with either TOS-Link Optical or Coaxial digital audio outputs, you can connect this component to the Cinema Reference Mach II for digital audio playback. When connecting a CD Player to an analog input, the audio signal is first converted to analog internal to the CD player and then the signal is converted back to digital internal to the Cinema Reference Mach II. As such, it is best to bypass this down/up conversion by connecting the CD player directly to a digital input on the Cinema Reference.

To maintain the most flexible Out of the Box setup, ADA suggests using a TOS-Link connection from the CD Player to the Cinema Reference. In the event, that your CD Player does not feature, a TOSLink Output, you can opt to use one of the four Digital Coaxial inputs on the Cinema Reference, providing these inputs are not already assigned to other source input labels. You will need to assess the other connections you have already made, as well as those you will make in the upcoming pages, to determine which Digital Coaxial input is open. If you have connected a DSS receiver to the Cinema Reference using a TOS-Link interconnect, then Digital Coaxial Input #2 is available for use with the CD Player.

Page 20

CD Player Digital Connections

CD Player Digital Audio TOS-Link Connection

CD PLAYER

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

2

1

R

Opitcal Digital

Audio Out

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

VIDEO OUT

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

1

7

5

6

3

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2341

REC

OSD

2

L

78

6

5

R

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

1

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

B

P

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

PR

12VDC OUT

DATA PORT

100mA Max Per

Serial Data

DC 1

ADA Bus¤

1- 2+

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

Y

3

OUTPUT

Y

4

CD Player Digital Audio Coaxial Connection

CD PLAYER

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Digital

Audio Out

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET“

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

AVERTISSEMENT!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

For T OS-Link connections use Optical Input #1. For Coaxial connections, use Digital Input #2 if it is not already assigned to the DSS. Y ou will also need to reassign the CD PLAYER 7 input label from Analog Input #6 to the appropriate digital input. To do so, follow these steps.

1 Turn the input knob

until display’s second line reads CD PLAYER 7 and

II

then press the Input knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob

clockwise until the

Side

115 V

display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob

clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob

counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads OPTICAL 1 (or DIGITAL 2).

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

2

L

1

R

7

4

6

8

L

2

3

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

VIDEO OUT

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

1

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

MAIN 2341

REC

2

OSD

L

78

5

6

R

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

At this time, you have reassigned the CD PLAYER 7 input label from tracking the Analog 6 input to the Optical 1 (or Digital 2) input.

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

UTPUT

P

B

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

Y

3

O

Y

4

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

12

V

DC

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ADA NET“

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

MADE IN U.S.A.

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

NE PAS OUVRIR

WARNING!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Please note that when using a TOS-Link interconnect, ADA strongly suggests us-

Side

ing the very best intercon-

115 V

nect available to prevent audio dropouts.

2

Page 21

Tuner (Radio) Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Radio Tuner provides for analog audio connections. Connect your line-level audio outputs from your Tuner to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Analog Audio input #7.

TUNER

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround

1

2

1

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

5

3

6

4

L

3

2

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

5

EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

OSD

L

7

78

6

R

7

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

RS

41

L

MAIN

R

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

C

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

SUBSBR

123

Y

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

4

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

123

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

Auxiliary Component Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a extra A/V component provides for analog audio and composite video connections on inputs #8. If you use this input label and wish to rename it, you can do so by following the instructions found under Input Labels.

AUXILIARY A/V COMPONENT

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

2

1

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

6

L

3

R

Video

Out

Video Cable

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

8

REC

1

7

OSD

2

8

L

5

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

RS

MAIN

MAIN 2

8

6

8

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

Y

3

O

UTPUT

P

Y

4

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

Page 22

Multi-Room System Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Multi-Room System provides for analog audio connections. Connect your line-level audio outputs from your Multi-Room System to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Analog Audio input #2.

MULTI-ROOM

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

2

1

R

2

7

5

3

8

6

4

L

4

3

2

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

MAIN 2

OSD

6

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

3

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

Y

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

4

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

123

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

115 V

Camcorder Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Camcorder provides for analog audio and composite video connections on analog audio input #1 and composite video input #7.

CAMCORDER

Audio Out

RL

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

1

R

1

Stereo

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

6

L

3

2

R

Video

Out

Video Cable

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

7

VIDEO OUT

REC

1

7

OSD

2

8

L

5

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

RS

MAIN

MAIN 2

6

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

Y

3

O

UTPUT

P

Y

4

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

115 V

Page 23

Video Game Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Video Game provides for digital audio as well as composite and component video connections. Connect your Digital audio output to Digital input #3. For video connect your Composite video output to input #6. If your display device is capable of showing a component video signal, connect the video games component video output to input #3. Please note, if your video game does not have a component video output, you can still display it using the composite video connection.

Digital Audio Video Game

Digital

Audio Out

VIDEO INPUTS

3

1

4

2

L

2

1

R

Video

Out

Composite Video

(Standard Connection)

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

6

5

6

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

REC

2

OSD

L

5

6

R

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

REC

L

78

R

that will offer a superior image

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

Component Video

(Optional video connection

providing that the display is

capable of supporting a

component video input.)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

333

Y

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

3

OUTPUT

B

P

Y

PR

123

4

3

4

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

123

Component Video Output

Y Cr Cb

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

ADA NET“

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

115 V

If you are connecting an older video game which only features analog audio outputs, you will need to reassign the VIDEO GAME input label to track an open analog audio jack. As the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box setup uses all available analog inputs, an open input may be available depending on the number of devices you have connected to the unit. For example, if you changed your CD Player connection to a digital input, then Analog input #6 is available for connection of the video game.

Page 24

Digital Output

Audio Cable

1

2

1

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

Video Cable

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO INPUTS

3

4

L

2

R

6

5

6

L

3

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

7

2

8

6

5

4

6

Video

Out

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

OSD

L

6

R

L

78

R

SBL LS

VIDEO GAME

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

L

C

INPUTS

MAIN

RS

OPTICAL INPUTS

R

SUBSBR

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

UTPUT

B

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

Y

3

O

Y

4

115 V

12

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET“

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

AVERTISSEMENT!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

1

2

3

4

3

5

6

4

7

8

5

1

2

6

REC

OSD

78

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

123

4

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

DATA PORT

Serial Data

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC 2 1- 2+

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage

Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

123

OPTICAL INPUTS

MAIN 2341

S-VIDEO INPUTS

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

REC

SBL LS

RS

L

R

C

SUBSBR

MAIN

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

L

R

RECORD

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

P

B

P

R

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

O

UTPUT

1

2

3

113

2514

POINTS

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

II

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

ADA NET“

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

2341

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

+10dB

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

0dB

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

115 V

COMPUTER

Digital

Audio Out

VGA Output

Digital Audio Cable

1

4

Computer Connection

1

2

3

4

3

5

6

4

7

8

5

1

2

6

REC

OSD

78

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

123

4

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

DATA PORT

Serial Data

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC 2 1- 2+

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

123

OPTICAL INPUTS

MAIN 2341

S-VIDEO INPUTS

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

REC

SBL LS

RS

L

R

C

SUBSBR

MAIN

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

L

R

RECORD

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

P

B

P

R

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

O

UTPUT

1

2

3

113

2514

POINTS

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

II

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

ADA NET“

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

2341

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

+10dB

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

0dB

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

115 V

PHONOGRAPH

Stereo

Audio OutGnd LR

1 1

Audio Cable

PP-1200 Phono Preamp

12VAC

Transformer

Ground

LR

GND

INPUT

OUTPUT

PP-1200

Phono Preamplifier

Ground Post

12VAC Power

Gain L

Phono Input

LR

Phono Preamp Output

LR

Gain R

L

GAIN GAIN

120VAC

R

12VAC

X-Former

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Computer provides for digital coaxial audio as well as a VGA video connection. Connect your Digital audio output to Digital input #4. Connect the VGA output of your PC to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s VGA input #1 (providing that your DVD is not already connected to this VGA input).

Phonograph Connection

The Out of the Box input configuration for a phonograph (record player) is on Analog Input 1, providing this input has not been already used for the connection of a Camcorder. Alternately, you may opt to use Analog 2 (Multi-Room System) or any other open analog input. Please note, that this would require you to change the audio input assignment for the PHONOGRPH Input label. ADA has purposely included a phonograph connection in the Out of the Box setup, because we believe you will be amazed from the sound you experience when playing your vinyl in either Quad Bypass mode, Pro Logic II Music mode, or a Pro Logic II Custom mode.

If your phonograph does not have a built-in phonopreamplifier (most players do not), you will require an external phono-preamplifier such as ADA’s PP-1200 Phono Preamp. The output of the phonograph connects to the input on the PP-1200. The PP-1200’s output connects to the Cinema Reference Mach II.

Page 25

Laserdisc Player with Internal RF Demodulator

The Out of the Box input configuration for a Laserdisc player has several different options depending on the type of laser disc player you are using. The most current laser disc players feature an internal AC-3 RF demodulator which is necessary to play Dolby Digital laser discs in a Dolby Digital mode. As such, these players permit a single digital audio connection for playback of two-channel (PCM digital audio), Dolby Digital, and even DTS laser discs (DTS discs are encoded in PCM digital audio and do not require an RF demodulator). If your laserdisc player features an AC-3 RF Output, use the instructions on the following page.

For laserdisc players that feature a combined digital audio output (PCM audio, DTS audio, and Dolby Digital), con-

Opitcal Digital

Audio Out

Video

Out

LASER DISC PLAYER

(With Internal RF Demodulator)

S-Video

Output

nect either a TOS-Link Optical or coaxial digital audio to the Cinema Reference Mach II. The Out of the Box setup for

Video Cable

S-Video Cable (If Input is available)

the LASERDISC input label has the audio input assigned to the Optical 1 jack on the Cinema Reference Mach II. The video jack assigned to this input label is Composite Video

8. S-Video input 4 is also assigned to this Input Label and can be connected to the laser disc player providing the VCR is not already connected in

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

4

6

2

L

2

3

1

R

AUDIO INPUTS

TOS-Link Optical Digital Interconnect

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

VIDEO OUT

8

7

1

8

2

4

5

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

L

R

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

OSD

6

L

78

R

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

113

2514

POINTS

Y

4

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

2341

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

1

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

3

Y

INPUTS

4

O

UTPUT

B

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

123

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

place. In the event the TOS-Link optical jack is already occupied or if your laserdisc player does not have an

optical TOS-Link audio output, you may use the Digital 2 coaxial audio input (assuming it has not be assigned to the DSS receiver).

1 Turn the input knob until display’s second line reads LASERDISC and then press the Input knob. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press the Mode knob. 4 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads DIGITAL 2.

Page 26

Digital

Audio Out

Video

Out

Video Cable

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

L

3

R

AUDIO INPUTS

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

8

REC

1

7

OSD

2

8

L

6

5

4

R

1

2

1

VIDEO INPUTS

3

4

L

R

5

6

2

Coaxial Digital Interconnect

LASER DISC PLAYER

(With Internal RF Demodulator)

S-Video

Output

S-Video Cable (If Input is available)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

MAIN 2341

REC

L

78

R

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

4

1

2

L

C

MAIN

R

RS

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

O

UTPUT

B

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

Y

3

Y

4

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET“

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

AVERTISSEMENT!

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

2

Laserdisc Player with only an AC-3 RF Output

The Cinema Reference Mach II features an input label for connection to an AC-3 RF demodulator, needed for laserdisc players that have a Dolby Digital AC-3 RF output. Some players manufactured after 1994 feature this output while others may have been modified with an additional AC-3 RF Output (MSB Technologies provided this modification). These players require an external AC-3 RF demodulator (ADA’s RFD-1) for playback of Dolby Digital (a.k.a. AC-3) laserdiscs using Dolby Digital decod- ing. Here, the laserdisc’s AC-3 RF output is passed into the RFD-1 and then to an open digital coaxial input on the Cinema Reference Mach II. You need to use one of the four digital coax inputs for connection to the RFD-1.

The Out of the Box configuration for the LASER AC3 input label is the Digital 2 coaxial

Opitcal Digital

Audio Out

(With AC-3 RF Output But No Internal RF Demodulator)

Video

Out

jack. Please note, you will also need to make the secondary optical TOS-Link digital audio connection (for non-AC3

Video Cable

laserdiscs) and video connections to the Cinema Reference Mach II. As such, when playing regular stereo or DTS laserdiscs, you will need to select the LASERDISC input label. When playing Dolby Digital (AC-3) laserdiscs, you will need to select the LASER AC3 input label.

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

4

6

2

L

2

3

1

R

8

7

8

4

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

5

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

REC

OSD

L

6

R

Laserdisc History

As a point of information, the

TOS-Link Optical Digital Interconnect

laserdisc, introduced in the late 1970’s, today contains four audio channels. Two channels contain PCM digital audio for playback of standard laserdiscs (CDs also contain

RFD-1

DIGITAL AC-3 RF DEMODULATOR

WARNING! RISK OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY! MAKE PROPER CONNECTIONS.

AVERTISSEMENT! ENERGIE ELECTRIQUE DANGEREUSE! FAIRE DES CONNEXIONS

PROPRES POUR L'HAUTPARLEUR. VOIR LA NOTICE DE FONCTIONNEMENT.

CAUTION: DISCONNECT SUPPLY CORD BEFORE SERVICING.

ATTENTION: DEBRANCHER AVANT LE DEPANNAGE.

AC-3 OUT

OUTPUT

two channels of PCM digital audio). The other two channels on a laserdisc date back to the late 1970’s, prior to the implementation of PCM digital audio (1983). Here, an audio signal is modulated onto a mono FM radio frequency. There is a mono FM channel for left and another for right. Those who viewed laser discs prior to the mid-1980’s, listened to the analog channels as the digital channels did not yet exist.

LASER DISC PLAYER

S-Video

Output

S-Video Cable (If Input is available)

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

L

78

R

DIGITAL

"DOLBY", "AC-3", AND THE DOUBLE-D

SYMBOL ARE TRADEMARKS OF DOLBY

LABORATORIES LICENSING CORP.

ADA RFD-1 AC-3 RF Demodulator

MAIN

RS

DC INPUT MUTE

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

4

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

L

C

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

R

SUBSBR

123

12

RF AC-3 IN INPUT

ON

OFF

Y

3

O

UTPUT

Y

4

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

P

123

115 V

Dolby Digital

AC-3 RF Output

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

ADA NET“

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

12VDC OUT

DATA PORT

100mA Max Per

Serial Data

DC 1

DC 2

ADA Bus¤

1- 2+

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

To Preamplifier

(110V)

2/10A S.B.

(220V)

1/10A S.B.

110/220 VAC SWITCHED

50-60 Hz, 15 WATT

To RFD-1

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

FUSE WARNING: Risk of Fire! Replace Fuse With Same Type & Rating.

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

In 1994, when Dolby Laboratories introduced AC-3 (now called Dolby Digital) for the home theater market, they decided that it would be best to include the AC-3 multi-channel digital bit stream on every laserdisc pressed (rather than release a special-order laserdisc). Because all players since the mid80’s read the digital PCM channels (rendering the mono-FM channels obsolete), Dolby decided to use one of these two antiquated mono-FM channels to embed (or modulate) the AC-3 bit stream. Thus, in order to decode the AC-3 bit stream from a laserdisc, one must first demodulate the mono-FM channel to extract the bit stream. In essence, the RFD-1 is a radio-frequency tuner (demodulator), hence the terminology-RFD. As the mono-FM signal passes through the RFD-1, the AC-3 bit stream is demodulated, emerging from the RFD-1 as a Dolby Digital signal, the exact same output as that of a DVD player.

Page 27

Theater (Main) Video Connections

1

2

3

4

3

5

6

4

7

8

5

1

2

6

REC

OSD

78

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

123

4

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

DATA PORT

Serial Data

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC 2 1- 2+

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

123

OPTICAL INPUTS

MAIN 2341

S-VIDEO INPUTS

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

REC

SBL LS

RS

L

R

C

SUBSBR

MAIN

4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

L

R

RECORD

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

P

B

P

R

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

O

UTPUT

1

2

3

113

2514

POINTS

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

II

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

ADA NET“

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

2341

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

+10dB

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

0dB

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

115 V

HDTV

TV or PROJECTOR

VIDEO INPUTS

Video

Input

VGA/HDTV

Input

Component Video Input

Y Cr Cb

Component Video

Video Cable (OSD Output used for Cinema Setup)

VGA Output

Processed

(For Comp.,

S-Video, & VGA)

To connect the Cinema Reference Mach II to your video display or line-doubler, first determine what connections your device has. Generally speaking, this section will discuss the following three options: an HD capable TV or projector, a line-doubler, or a TV or projector with only composite and S-Video inputs.

HD Capable TV or Projector

With this type of display device, you will most likely have a host of video inputs. As no line-doubler device is present with this type of system, you can opt to use the line-doubler built into the Cinema Reference Mach II. This doubler also acts as an up-convertor for composite video and SVideo inputs. As such, there is no need to connect either composite or S-Video cables to the TV/projector as these signals are up-converted (and doubled) internal to the Cinema Reference Mach II and come out of the VGA/HDTV Processed output. This is in addition to any VGA/RGBHV inputs to the Cinema Reference Mach II. The only additional connection that is required is the component video connection because the Cinema Reference’s internal doubler/up-convertor does not do anything to the component video inputs.

The only additional connection that can be made is the composite video output of the Cinema Reference Mach II marked OSD. This output provides On Screen Display which may be useful during setup.

As such, in this installation, when the display device is set to the composite video input, you will be able to utilize the Cinema Reference’s on-screen readout during setup. Then for normal operation, select either the VGA/HDTV input for VGA/RGBHV sources, S-Video sources, and even composite video sources. For component video sources, such as DVD players or video games, set the TV/ projector to the component video input.

Line-Doublers

While you cannot see anything on a line-doubler, they are used to both up-convert, scale, and double (or even quadruple) the incoming source signals. In high-end home theater installations, use of this type of device between the Cinema Reference Mach II and the TV or projector is quite common. Please note, that as you switch between inputs on the Cinema Reference, you may also need to switch between inputs on your line-doubler.

Page 28

LINE DOUBLER

VIDEO INPUTS

Video

Input 1

Input 2

Input

VGA/HDTV

Input

Component Video Input

Y Cr Cb

Because the line-doubler is handling all the video process-

S-Video

Video

ing, you will not need to use

Video Cable

(Video 1 for normal

viewing. Video 2

for OSD output

during setup.

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

1

R

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

REC

1

7

5

3

OSD

2

8

6

4

L

5

4

3

2

R

AUDIO INPUTS

S-Video

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

L

78

6

R

RS

VGA Output Un-Processed

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

MAIN

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

Component Video

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

O

UTPUT

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

Y

3

Y

4

115 V

I

N

12

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Voltage

Side

115 V

the built-in line-doubler/upconvertor internal to the Cinema Reference Mach II. Use the Un-Processed VGA/ HDTV output for RGBHV/VGA sources connected to the Cinema Reference You will also need to run separate feeds to the line-doubler for composite video, S-Video, and component video. If your line-dou-

bler has two composite video inputs, you can connect the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Main 1 video output to the line-doubler’s video input #1, while the Cinema Reference’s OSD composite video output is connected to the linedoubler’s video input #2. When on video input #2, you will see the OSD useful during setup. For viewing composite video sources (cable TV), you would switch the line-doubler to video input #1, the same composite video signal without the OSD. In the event your line-doubler does not have two composite video inputs, you can connect the OSD output during setup and then replace it with the non-OSD composite video signal.

Basic (Non-HDTV) TVs and Projectors

When using a more basic TV or projector, you will need to closely examine the type of video inputs available. For discussion purposes, the diagram does show a component video input however, this connection will not exist on most TV’s capable of both composite and S-Video. Remember that for this level of display device, there is no up or down conversion available. As such, if your TV only features composite and S-Video inputs, any sources that are solely connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II with either component or HDTV/VGA, will not play to the TV. Naturally, if the TV also features the

component video input, it will display sources connected to the Cinema Reference via component video. As with

other display devices men-

Video

Input 1

Video

Input 2

S-Video

Input

TV or PROJECTOR

VIDEO INPUTS

Component Video Input

Y Cr Cb

tioned, you will need to switch the TV to the correct input based on what is selected on

the Cinema Reference.

Again, there are two compos-

Video Cable

(Video 1 for normal

viewing. Video 2

for OSD output

during setup.

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

1

R

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO OUT

7

5

3

8

6

4

L

4

3

2

R

AUDIO INPUTS

S-Video

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

1

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2341

REC

OSD

2

L

78

6

5

R

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

ite video connections that can

Component Video

be made to a more basic TV.

One provides the OSD (On-

Screen Display) output of the

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

OUTPUT

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

B

P

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

PR

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

Y

3

Y

4

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET“

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

AVERTISSEMENT!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

Cinema Reference Mach II, useful for setup. The other composite video signal does not overlay the OSD output and may be more ideal for normal viewing of composite video sources.

Page 29

Recording Output

The Cinema Reference Mach II features a recording output which permits selection of a stereo (analog) audio signal, as well as composite and S-Video, independent of the output playing in the theater environment. This is useful for either sending a signal to a recording device, a high-end two channel audio system, a second monitor, a second zone, or perhaps even a multi-room system. There are some rules that must be considered when working with the Cinema Reference Mach II’s record output. Connect the component you wish to record to as shown.

Record Audio Output Only Passes Analog Audio Inputs

The record audio output only

Video

Input

S-Video

Input

VCR

RECORD INPUTS

Audio Input

R L

passes analog audio. Regardless of the number of digital sources connected to your system, only the eight analog

Video Cable

S-Video

Analog Audio

audio inputs are available through the record output. The

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

7

1

8

2

4

5

LINE-DOUBLED

REC

OSD

L

R

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

6

L

78

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

O

UTPUT

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

Y

3

Y

4

115 V

I

N

12

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Selector & Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

record output is designed to satisfy purists who want to be able to select an audio source without any analog/digital conversion. As such, digital sources are not down-converted to analog.

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

4

6

2

L

2

3

1

R

AUDIO INPUTS

Record Video Output Only Passes Composite or S-Video

Composite video and S-Video are also not converted to each other. As such, only a composite video input is passed through the composite video output. Also, S-Video inputs are only passed through SVideo outputs.

Record Audio Outputs Do Not Pass Digital Audio Inputs

In order to play a digital source through the analog record output, you will need to connect that component’s analog audio output to the Cinema Reference Mach II in addition to its digital audio output. Furthermore, because each input label can only have one audio input assigned to it (analog 18, digital 1-4, or optical 1-4), you will need to use alternate input labels which share the same video jacks but are assigned to alternate analog audio input.

For example, if you want to record your DSS receiver to a VCR and your DSS receiver is connected digitally to the Cinema Reference for Dolby Digital surround sound, you will need to connect the DSS receiver’s analog audio output to an open analog audio input.

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box input configuration already has A record specific input label for DSS, whose primary audio connection will always be digital. For the other three components that could be set to an alternate digital audio input, including DVR/PVR, CABLE/TV, or CD PLAYER, there are also record input labels that access their original analog audio input. The chart below details these Out of the Box options.

INPUT #

1 7 DSS RECORD

1 8 DVR RECORD

1 9 TV RECORD

2 0 CD RECORD

INPUT LABEL

REASON FOR

SPECIAL RECORD

INPUT LABEL

CONNECTED

DIGITALLY

MAY BE CONNECTED

DIGITALLY

MAY BE CONNECTED

DIGITALLY

MAY BE CONNECTED

DIGITALLY

RECORD INPUT LABEL

AUDIO INPUT

STANDARD INPUT LABEL

AUDIO INPUT

ALTERNATE

AUDIO INPUT

ANALOG 2 OPTICAL 2 DIGITAL 2 MULTI-ROOM

ANALOG 3 ANALOG 3 OPTICAL 3 NONE

ANALOG 5 ANALOG 5 OPTICAL 4 NONE

ANALOG 6 ANALOG 6 OPTICAL 1 NONE

POTENTIAL OUT OF

THE BOX RECORD

INPUT CONFLICT

Page 30

DSS Receiver Analog Record Connection

If you do not have a multi-room system’s output connected to the Cinema Reference’s ana-

ANALOG AUDIO RECORDING CONNECTION

(IN ADDITION TO OTHER DIGITAL AUDIO AND VIDEO CONNECTIONS)

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

DSS RECEIVER

log audio input #2, proceed to connect the DSS receiver’s analog audio output as noted

Audio Cable

in the diagram. Again, this

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

7

1

8

2

4

5

LINE-DOUBLED

REC

OSD

L

R

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

6

L

78

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

Y

3

O

UTPUT

P

Y

4

cable is in addition to the other digital audio and video cables connected to the Cinema Reference from the DSS receiver. If the Cinema Reference’s analog audio input #2 is already connected to another compo-

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

4

6

2

L

2

3

1

R

2

AUDIO INPUTS

nent (i.e. Multi-Room System), follow the procedures in this section under Reassigning Record Audio Inputs.

DVR/PVR (DIGITAL AUDIO CAPABLE)

DVR/PVR Analog Record Connection

If you connected your DVR to

Audio Out

RL

ANALOG AUDIO RECORDING CONNECTION

(IN ADDITION TO OTHER DIGITAL AUDIO AND VIDEO CONNECTIONS)

Stereo

the Cinema Reference using an optical digital audio connection, you will still need to connect the DVR’s analog audio output to the Cinema Reference’s analog input #3 as in the diagram. If you did not connect your DVR digitally, ignore this step as it is already in place.

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

3

1

R

3

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

5

6

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

REC

OSD

3

4

2

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

6

L

78

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

Y

3

O

UTPUT

P

Y

4

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

123

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

B

123

P

R

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

115 V

V

DC

115 V

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Selector &

Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Selector & Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

CABLE/TV Analog Record Connection

If you connected your digital capable CABLE/TV tuner to the Cinema Reference using an optical digital audio connection, you will still need to connect the tuner’s analog audio output to the Cinema Reference’s analog input #5 as in the diagram. If you did not connect your tuner digitally, ignore this step as it is already in place.

RL

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

1

R

CABLE/TV TUNER (DIGITAL AUDIO CAPABLE)

ANALOG AUDIO RECORDING CONNECTION

(IN ADDITION TO OTHER DIGITAL AUDIO AND VIDEO CONNECTIONS)

Stereo

Audio Out

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

5

6

3

7

8

L

5

4

R

5

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

REC

OSD

3

4

2

EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

L

78

6

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

P

R

123

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

115 V

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Page 31

Selector & Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

CD Player Analog Record Connection

If you connected your CD PLAYER to the Cinema Reference using an optical digital

Stereo

Audio Out

RL

CD PLAYER (DIGITAL AUDIO CAPABLE)

ANALOG AUDIO RECORDING CONNECTION

(IN ADDITION TO OTHER DIGITAL AUDIO AND VIDEO CONNECTIONS)

audio connection, you will still need to connect the CD’s analog audio output to the Cinema

Audio Cable

Reference’s analog input #6 as

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

7

1

8

2

6

4

5

6

LINE-DOUBLED

REC

OSD

L

R

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

6

L

78

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Y

3

Y

4

RECORD

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

OUT

L

O

UTPUT

R

B

P

R

123

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ADA NET“

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

MADE IN U.S.A.

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

DO NOT OPEN

NE PAS OUVRIR

WARNING!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Side

115 V

in the diagram. If you did not connect your CD player digitally , ignore this step as it is already in place.

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

4

6

2

L

2

3

1

R

AUDIO INPUTS

DVD Player Analog Record Connection

In order to maximize the Out of the Box input configuration options, ADA has purposely not included a DVD RECORD input label, with the primary consideration that DVD discs incorporate copyright protection that will prevent the copying of a DVD disc to VCR.

In the event you wish to pass the DVD player through your record output to feed to a second zone or are using your DVD player as your primary CD transport, which you wish to record from, you will need to create a DVD RECORD Input label as well as use an open analog input on the Cinema Reference. If no open analog input exists, you will have to skip this option. To alter the text of an Input label that is not being utilized, see the section entitled Label Inputs. Once the Input Label has been

ANALOG AUDIO RECORDING CONNECTION

(IN ADDITION TO OTHER DIGITAL AUDIO AND VIDEO CONNECTIONS)

Stereo

Audio Out RL

DVD PLAYER

created for DVD RECORD, you can then assign the analog audio jack on the Cinema Reference to this Input label’s audio input. Y ou will also need to need to assign the existing composite video, S-Video, component video, and RGB video input jacks to this Input label (DVD uses all video inputs #1). This is explained under Custom In-

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

1

R

1

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

5

6

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

REC

OSD

3

4

2

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

6

L

78

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

O

UTPUT

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

B

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

Y

3

Y

4

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ADA NET“

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

MADE IN U.S.A.

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

DO NOT OPEN

NE PAS OUVRIR

WARNING!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Side

115 V

put Configuration.

Components Inability to Play both Digital and Analog Audio

Please note, that some components are only capable of playing either a digital audio signal or analog audio signal. For these devices, there is typically a setup operation that permits you to select which audio jack is active. If you are not getting analog audio to pass through the record output, even though your connections are as illustrated, check the component’s operation manual to make certain that it can play both digital and analog audio simultaneously.

Page 32

Reassigning Record Audio Inputs

If you are limited on the number of open analog inputs on the back of the Cinema Reference Mach II, ADA suggests making certain that the DSS receiver takes precedence to the DVD player. Because you may only get questionable results from attempting to record a DVD to VCR, ADA recommends first connecting the DSS. To begin:

1 Find an open analog audio input on the back of the Cinema Reference and connect the DSS

receiver’s analog audio output to it. Remember the input number used for step #5.

2 Turn the Input knob until the display’s second line reads DSS RECORD and press the Input

knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press

the Mode knob.

5 Turn the Mode knob until the display reads the ANALOG # that you connected the DSS to in

step #1.

Turn the V olume knob to exit the setup mode. At this time, you should be able to turn the Record knob and send audio and video to your recording device.

To test this with a VCR as a recording device, you can do the following.

1 Make certain that the DSS is on an active channel, that your DVR is operating, that your Cable/

TV T uner is on a station, and that your CD player is in play . You can do this by selecting the various components using the Input knob.

2 Then turn the Input knob to the VCR and select. Make certain that your VCR is set to accept

a video input. This may involve pressing the VCR’s TV/Video button as this typically toggles between the VCR’s internal TV tuner and its rear panel A/V jacks.

At this time, by selecting the VCR on the main input (using the Input knob), the main output is monitoring what the VCR is receiving. To check that your devices are properly going through the record output:

3 Turn the Record knob until the first record option is selected (i.e. DSS RECORD) and press

the Record knob. The main output (theater) should play this component through the VCR indicating that the VCR is receiving both the audio and video signal.

4 Repeat this process for other components. Please note, that for common analog components,

such as radio tuners, simply selecting the standard TUNER input will work. If you did not connect the DVR/PVR, Cable/TV, or CD input digitally to the Cinema Reference, the nonRECORD versions of these input labels will pass to the VCR as well.

Page 33

Custom Input Configuration

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s input configuration can also be completely customized to suite your specific system. ADA suggests to begin connecting components to the Cinema Reference Mach II using the Out of the Box options discussed on the previous pages. You can then modify your setup to best suit your needs. This will save some time.

When desiring to work with a Custom input configuration, you may want to consider the following items prior to making any changes to the setup.

How many source components (input devices) are in the system?

Begin the process by determining the number of source (input) devices that will be connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II.

Will you be using the record output?

While this is discussed in greater detail on the previous pages, if you plan on recording from the Cinema Reference Mach II’s record output, make a quick review of the devices that are connected digitally (using either coaxial or optical interconnects) to the Cinema Reference Mach II. At this time, determine if all of the digital devices are going to need to pass audio out of the record output. For example, because of copy-protection features, you will most likely not be able to record a DVD disc onto video tape and as such, you may select to eliminate worrying about record options for DVD.

In order to record a source component that is digitally connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II, you will need to setup a separate input label for that source. While this new record input label tracks the same video options of the input label that has a digital audio connection, the record input label will need to be set to track an analog audio connection. The record output only passes analog audio inputs.

Final Input

Add together the number of source components and the number of record components (that are connected digitally to the Cinema Reference). This total is the number of input labels you will need the Cinema Reference to display.

For example, your system has a total of seven source components; DVD, DSS, DVR, VCR, CABLE box, CD, and TUNER. DVD and DSS are connected digitally but as you won’t be recording off the DVD player, you only need to pass the DSS receiver to the record output. As such, you will need a total of eight input labels to display, seven for the primary seven sources and one additional Record type input for DSS record.

Y ou can now set the Cinema Reference Mach II to display only the first eight input labels instead of the factory default 20 input labels. As you continuously turn the Input knob, only the first eight labels will be displayed. Please note, that if either the main Input or the Record Input is set to any input above input number 8, the Cinema Reference will not permit you to proceed. To proceed with this setup feature:

1 Turn the Input knob so that the second line displays an input below the input 9 label and press

the Input knob.

2 Turn the Record knob so that the second line displays an input below the input 9 label and

press the Input knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

Page 34

4 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads FINAL INPUT and press

the Mode knob.

5 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads the appropriate

final input number. This number is displayed after the input label name. For this step, disregard the name of the input labels as these can be altered later . Please note, that if the display flashes the words CONFLICT WITH and then an input label, you have reached an input that is still being directed to either the main or the record output. You will notice that the Cinema Reference will not permit you to select a Final Input that is below an actively selected input, hence the conflict warning. To permit a Final Input below this number, exit the setup mode and make certain to select both a main Input and Record input lower than your desired final input.

6 Turn the Volume knob to exit this setup operation.

At this time, turning of either the Input or Record knob will display only the first eight input label names. Final Input is the first step under Custom Input Configuration because it sets the number of inputs to correspond to the number of device connections. Again, if some of the input labels do not match the components in your system, the next steps will permit you to make these custom changes as well.

Label Inputs

The Cinema Reference Mach II permits you to alter any input label. The label length allows for up to twelve letters, characters, and/or numbers. ADA strongly suggests leaving the original number (i.e. the number “8” as in AUXILIARY 8) in place. This number refers to the inputs position for control purposes and is important when selecting inputs from a remote control, PC, or control system. Eliminating this number from the input label does not defeat the ability for the input to be selected from a control, it just makes it harder for you to identify it numerically.

Now that you have set the final input, ADA suggests renaming any input label that does not match your system. In the example used for Final Input, where the system will consist of eight input labels:

DVD, DSS, DVR/PVR, VCR, CABLE/TV, CD, TUNER, DSS RECORD

with the current display reading

DVD, DSS, DVR/PVR, VCR, CABLE/TV, CD PLAYER, TUNER, AUXILIARY

ADA suggests leaving as many Out of the Box input labels (and their configuration) alone. This will permit you to customize your system faster and easier. For example, in viewing the current display input label options, it appears that only one input label really requires any change (AUXILIARY). We will need to change this to DSS RECORD. Naturally , if you are particular about the order components appear as you turn the Input or Record knobs, you may wish to alter other input labels as well. If so, remember that you will also need to reassign several other Out of the Box and Default settings as well.

ADA provides a PC program (Cinema Ref PCOS) that permits you to make these and further changes quite easily . Y ou will need either an ISO-232 or IRT -3000 to communicate from your PC to the Cinema Reference Mach II. This is discussed in the section marked PC Control.

When entering the LABEL INPUT setup mode on the Cinema Reference Mach II, there are three tiered levels in which you navigate. The first level permits you to select the input label you wish to alter. Even though you may have already specified a Final Input, all twenty input labels appear in this level.

Page 35

To enter the Label Inputs setup mode, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then press the Mode Knob. Y ou then turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads LABEL INPUTS and then again, press the Mode knob. The display will now read:

LABEL INPUTS DVD PLAYER 1

You navigate out of this level by turning the Mode knob all the way clockwise until the display reads BACK TO MAIN and then pressing the mode knob.

The second level permits you to select which character in the input label you wish to alter. Here the selected character is flashing and underlined while the display looks like:

LABEL INPUTS

You navigate into this level with the press of the Mode knob going to >...<. You navigate back to the previous level by turning the Mode knob all the way clockwise until the display reads BACK TO LABL and then pressing the mode knob.

The third level is the stage in which you change the letter, number, or symbol. At this level, the selected character is flashing and underlined the display looks like:

LABEL INPUTS

>DVD PLAYER<

You navigate into this level with the press of the Mode knob going from <...> to >...<. You navigate back to the previous level by pressing the Mode knob going from >...< back to <...>.

In the example defined earlier with the eight input labels, we only need to alter AUXILIARY to read DSS RECORD as shown below:

DVD, DSS, DVR/PVR, VCR, CABLE/TV, CD, TUNER, DSS RECORD

with the current display reading

DVD, DSS, DVR/PVR, VCR, CABLE/TV, CD PLAYER, TUNER, AUXILIARY To enter the setup mode and alter the AUXILIARY input label to read DSS RECORD: 1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads LABEL INPUTS and then

press the Mode knob. 3 The top line of the display will read LABEL INPUTS and the second line will display the first

input label, DVD PLAYER 1. Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUXILIARY 8 and then press the Mode knob.

Page 36

4 The second line of the display will now show <AUXILIARY 8> where the <...> indicates that you are in the select character position mode. Here the A will be underlined and blinking.

5 To change the A to a D, as in DSS RECORD, press the Mode knob. The second line of the display will now change to >AUXILIARY 8<, where the >...< indicates that you are in the change character mode. Again, the A will be underlined and blinking, indicating that you can now change the A to a D.

6 Turn the Mode knob clockwise to change the A to a D and then press the Mode knob so that the display now reads <DUXILIARY 8>.

7 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click so that U is underlined and blinking and then press the Mode knob. The display will again change from the select character position mode (<...>) to the change character mode (>...<).

8 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise so that the U changes to the letter S and then press the Mode knob to return to the select character mode (<...>).

9 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click so that the X is underlined and blinking and then press the Mode knob to switch to change character mode (>...<).

10 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise so that the X changes to an S and then press the mode knob.

11 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click so that the I is underlined and blinking and then press the Mode knob.

12 To turn the letter I into a blank space (as in DSS RECORD), turn the Mode knob all the way counterclockwise. The very last position is the blank space. Then press the Mode knob.

13 With the display now reading <DSS LIAR Y 8>, turn the Mode clockwise one click until the L is underlined and flashing. Then press the Mode knob.

14 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the letter L has been replaced by the letter R and press the Mode knob.

15 W ith the display now reading <DSS RIARY 8>, turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the I is flashing and press the Mode knob.

16 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the I is replaced with letter E and then press the Mode Knob.

17 W ith the display now reading <DSS REARY 8>, turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the A is flashing and press the Mode knob.

18 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the A is replaced with letter C and then press the Mode Knob.

19 With the display now reading <DSS RECRY 8>, turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the R is flashing and press the Mode knob.

Page 37

20 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the R is replaced with letter O and then press the Mode Knob.

21 With the display now reading <DSS RECOY 8>, turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the Y is flashing and press the Mode knob.

22 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the Y is replaced with letter D and then press the Mode Knob.

23 With the display now reading <DSS RECOR 8>, turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the blank space is flashing and press the Mode knob.

24 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the blank space is replaced with letter D and then press the Mode Knob.

25 With the display now reading <DSS RECORD 8>, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display read’s BACK TO LABL and press the Mode knob.

26 To continue with other setup options, turn the mode knob clockwise until the display reads BACK TO MAIN. To exit the setup mode entirely, turn the Volume knob.

Audio Input Configuration

The Cinema Reference Mach II is extraordinarily flexible in that any A/V jack on the back of the unit can be assigned to any input label. Also, a specific A/V jack can be assigned to multiple input labels. While the Out of the Box input configuration of the Cinema Reference Mach II has the jacks preassigned as noted in the previous sections, you may wish to alter some of these conditions when customizing your system. Use the Out of the Box input configuration chart below as a guide to determining what jacks are already assigned in the Out of the Box setup.

INPUT

INPUT LABEL

#

1 DVD PLAYER DIGITAL 1 - 1111S-VIDEO 2 D SS OPTICAL 2 DIGITAL 2 2222S-VIDEO 3 DVR/PVR ANALOG 3 OPTICAL 3 3 3 - 3 S-VIDEO 4 VC R ANALOG 4 - 4 4 - - COMPOSITE 5 CABLE/TV ANALOG 5 OPTICAL 4 5 - - 4 COMPOSITE 6 CD PLAYER ANALOG 6 OPTICAL 1 ----COMPOSITE 7 TUNER ANALOG 7 - ----COMPOSITE 8 AUXILIARY ANALOG 8 - 8 - - - COMPOSITE

9 DVD AUDIO MULTI-PIN - 1111COMPOSITE 1 0 MULTI-ROOM ANALOG 2 - ----COMPOSITE 1 1 CAMCORDER ANALOG 1 - 7 - - - COMPOSITE 1 2 VIDEO GAME DIGITAL 3 OPTICAL 1 6 - 3 - COMPOSITE 1 3 COMPUTER DIGITAL 4 OPTICAL 1 ---1RGB 1 4 LASERDISC OPTICAL 1 - 8 - - - COMPOSITE 1 5 LASER AC3 DIGITAL 2 - 8 - - - COMPOSITE 1 6 PHONOGRPH ANALOG 1 - ----COMPOSITE 1 7 DSS RECORD ANALOG 2 - 2222COMPOSITE 1 8 DVR RECORD ANALOG 3 - 3 3 - 3 COMPOSITE 1 9 TV RECORD ANALOG 5 - 5 - - 4 COMPOSITE 2 0 CD RECORD ANALOG 6 - ----COMPOSITE

AUDIO

INPUT

ALTERNATE

AUDIO INPUT

COMPOSITE

VIDEO

INPUT

S-VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO INPUT

RGB (HV)

INPUT

HDTV

CONVERSION

OUTPUT

Taking the example in this section with the eight input labels, the first seven input labels follow the Out of the Box setup. The eight input label, previously AUXILIARY now labeled DSS RECORD, will require alteration.

Page 38

ANALOG AUDIO RECORDING CONNECTION

(IN ADDITION TO OTHER DIGITAL AUDIO AND VIDEO CONNECTIONS)

Stereo

Audio Out RL

DSS RECEIVER

Assuming that the DSS RECORD setup was followed as outline under the Record section of this manual, the DSS receiver’s analog audio output has already been con-

Audio Cable

VIDEO INPUTS

1

2

L

2

1

R

2

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

5

6

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

REC

OSD

3

4

2

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

6

L

78

R

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

O

UTPUT

B

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

123

RECORD

OUT

L

R

P

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

4

G

ND

O

UT

Y

3

Y

4

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

1- 2+

I

N

12

V

DC

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

ADA NET“

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2

1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

AVERTISSEMENT!

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Selector &

Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

nected to the Cinema Reference’s Analog input #2 as in the diagram. This connection is in addition to the standard DSS connections in the Out of the Box setup.

The first step is to now configure the DSS RECORD 8 input label to track analog input #2.

1 Turn the Input knob until DSS RECORD is seen on the display’s second line and press the

Input knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads AUDIO INPUTS and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads ANALOG 2 instead

of ANALOG 8.

5 Press the Mode knob to return the display to read SETUP MENU & AUDIO INPUTS. As we

will be making changes to the video inputs, you need not exit the setup mode yet.

These steps can be used to reassign any input label to either a digital coaxial, optical TOS-Link, or analog stereo audio input.

Composite Video Input Configuration

To alter an input label’s composite video rear panel connection, one uses the same process as with the audio jack. Continuing with this example, the DSS receiver’s normal playback input label is assigned to Composite Video input #2. The AUXILIARY input label is Out of the Box defaulted to composite video input #8. As such, with the DSS RECORD input label replacing AUXILIARY, we will need to reassign the video input so that DSS RECORD tracks the same video jack as normal DSS. To do so, follow these steps (assuming you have not exited the SETUP MENU).

6 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads COMPOSITE IN and press

the Mode knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise to change the display from COMPOSITE IN 8 to COM-

POSITE IN 2.

8 Press the Mode knob to return to the previous state where the display reads SETUP MENU &

COMPOSITE IN.

Page 39

S-Video Input Configuration

As with the composite video input, the S-Video for the DSS RECORD input label needs to be set to track the S-Video input for the DSS’s normal input. As the DSS is set to track S-Video input #2, proceed with the following:

9 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SVIDEO INPUT and press

the Mode knob.

10 Turn the Mode knob until the display reads SVIDEO INPUT 2 and then press the Mode knob.

Component Video Input Configuration

To keep the system perfectly aligned, we will need to assign the component video input for the eighth input label, DSS RECORD 8, to match that of the normal DSS input. To do so:

11 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads COMPONENT IN and

press the Mode knob.

12 Turn the Mode knob until the display reads COMPONENT IN 2 and press the mode knob.

RGB/HDTV/VGA Input Configuration

To assign the DSS RECORD 8 input label to track the normal DSS input’s VGA connection:

13 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads RGB INPUT and press the

Mode knob. 14 Turn the Mode knob until the display reads RGB INPUT 2 and then press the Mode knob. 15 Turn the Volume knob to exit the setup mode.

At this time, you have reassigned all of the A/V inputs on the Cinema Reference Mach II from the factory default settings for the AUXILIARY 8 input label to work for the DSS RECORD 8 input label.

HDTV Output Configuration

The HDTV Output setting is used if you are connecting your display device to the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Processed VGA Output. Here you can determine per input, which signal is going to be routed through the Processed VGA output. Prior to proceeding with this setup feature, there are some items that should be considered.

Are you using a Line-Doubler?

If you are using an external line-doubler, scaler or up-convertor, you will most likely not be going to using the internal doubler in the Cinema Reference Mach II. As such, you most likely be using the UnProcessed VGA output of the Cinema Reference Mach II and as such, need not worry about any adjustments here.

Are you connecting an RGB/VGA cable to your display device?

If you are not connecting a an RGB/VGA cable to the display device, again this section will not pertain to your system’s setup.

Your are using the Processed VGA Output of the Cinema Reference Mach II.

Page 40

If you are using this output, you can determine the up-conversion path for every input label. The options here are doubling/up-converting from a composite video input to the processed VGA output, doubling/up-converting from a S-Video to the processed VGA output, or simply running a VGA input directly to the VGA output. The Out of the Box setup has the options for video inputs and up-conversion through the HDTV/VGA output.

Because the Out of the Box setup is intended to work for the most basic devices in the class of components (i.e. regular DSS receivers vs. HDTV DSS receivers), you see that instead of providing the VGA input for DSS, the Out of the Box setup has the processed VGA output set to S-V ideo. The same is true for the DVR (if you are using the more advanced DVR’s, they feature a VGA output). In the same line, since not all VCRs feature an S-Video output, the Out of the Box setup shows that only composite video is passed through the processed

INPUT #INPUT

LABEL

1 DVD PLAYER 1 1 1 1 S-VIDEO 2 DSS 2 2 2 2 S-VIDEO 3 DVR/PVR 3 3 - 3 S-VIDEO 4 VCR 4 4 - - COMPOSITE 5 CABLE/TV 5 - - 4 CO MPOSITE 6 CD PLAYER - - - - COMPOSITE 7 TUNER - - - - COMPOSITE 8 AUXILIARY 8 - - - CO M POSITE

9 DVD AUDIO 1 1 1 1 COMPOSITE 1 0 MULTI-ROOM - - - - COMPOSITE 1 1 CAMCORDER 7 - - - COMPOSITE 1 2 VIDEO GAME 6 - 3 - COMPOSITE 1 3 COMPUTER - - - 1 RGB 1 4 LASERDISC 8 - - - COMPOSITE 1 5 LASER AC3 8 - - - COMPOSITE 1 6 PHONOGRPH - - - - COMPOSITE 1 7 DSS RECORD 2 2 - - COMPOSITE 1 8 DVR RECORD 3 3 - - COMPOSITE 1 9 TV RECORD 5 - - - COMPOSITE 2 0 CD RECORD - - - - COMPOSITE

COMPOSITE

VIDEO

INPUT

S-VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT

RGB (HV)

INPUT

HDTV

CONVERSION

OUTPUT

VGA output. As such, you may need to alter the HDTV OUTPUT setting for components that have a superior video

output than the Out of the Box (more generic) setup. As a reminder, the following devices deserve consideration.

DVD Player - If your DVD player features a VGA or RGBHV output you will want to set the HDTV Conversion Output to RGB.

DSS Receiver - If your DSS Receiver features a VGA or RGBHV output you will want to set the HDTV Conversion Output to RGB.

DVR/PVR - If your DVR features a VGA or RGBHV output you will want to set the HDTV Conversion Output to RGB.

VCR - If your VCR features an S-Video output you will want to set the HDTV Conversion Output to SVIDEO.

CABLE/TV - If your HD Cable or TV tuner features a VGA or RGBHV output you will want to set the HDTV Conversion Output to RGB.

Obviously , because the Cinema Reference Mach II is so incredibly flexible, this feature and its operation might apply to other input labels in the event you have already altered your system’s input configurations.

To change the processed video output up-conversion signal:

1 Turn the Input knob until the display’s second line reads the input you need to modify and then

press the input knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

Page 41

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads HDTV OUTPUT and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob until the display reads the appropriate processed VGA output. As a

reminder, COMPOSITE IN refers to up-converting the source’s composite video input, SVIDEO INPUT refers to up-converting the source’s S-V ideo input, and RGB INPUT refers to simply passing the source components VGA/HDTV input directly through the processed VGA output.

Repeat these steps for every input label that you wish to readjust.

Auxiliary DC Triggers

The Cinema Reference Mach II has two low voltage outputs which can be used to trigger other components or devices. These triggers can be used to perform several different operations such as:

a Engaging a projector, screen, etc., for only video devices. b Alternate speaker drivers between music and film playback. c Turning on a power amplifier using an external AC switcher (ADA ACC-3 - 15 Amp Rating) if

the amplifier will draw more than 10 amps current (Cinema Reference’s Switched AC Outlet maximum).

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

2

L

1

R

7

4

6

8

L

2

3

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

REC

2

OSD

L

4

5

R

EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

L

78

6

R

RS

L

MAIN

R

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

2

DIGITAL AUDIO

C

OPTICAL INPUTS

SUBSBR

123

INPUTS

Y

3

O

Y

4

UTPUT

P

B

123

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH OME THEATER CONTROLLER

H

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Selector & Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

Page 42

MPA-501

POWER

ON

OFF

MPS-500

1234

-A+ -B+

ACC-3

TO AC

CIRCUIT

The Cinema Reference sports two such triggers and both of these triggers are input specific. The Out of the Box setup is as follows:

AUX DC TRIG 1 = Engages with all inputs. AUX DC TRIG 2 = Engages with only the components that have a video inputs:

DVD PLAYER 1, DSS 2, DVR/PVR 3, VCR 4, CABLE/TV 5, AUXILIARY 8, DVD AUDIO 9, CAMCORDER 11, VIDEO GAME 12, COMPUTER 13, DVD RECORD 14, DSS RECORD 15, DVR RECORD 16, TV RECORD 17, AUXILIARY 2, & AUXILIARY 3

Since most home theaters using this feature will involve some level of professional setup, you can alter the Aux DC Triggers using the following steps. If you are planning on adjusting the Final Input or Input Labels, ADA suggests first making these adjustments prior to proceeding with the Aux DC Trigger setup.

To setup and verify the Aux DC Triggers:

1 Turn the Input knob to the input label you wish to set the trigger for and press the Input knob. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads either AUX TRIGGER1 or

AUX TRIGGER2 and press the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob to turn the AUX TRIGGER # ON or OFF, then press the Mode knob.

Repeat this step as necessary.

Turn On Input

When controlling the Cinema Reference Mach II from a remote control or control system, the action of first selecting an input, causes the Cinema Reference to turn on and switch to that input.

However, when turning the Cinema Reference on from its front panel, by pressing the Volume knob, the Cinema Reference’s Out of the Box default setting will cause it to turn on to the last input that was used. If you would prefer to have the Cinema Reference turn on to a specific input, every time the front panel Volume knob is pressed (assuming the unit was off), then follow the steps below. Please note, that altering the Turn On input from Last Used to a specific device does not af fect your ability to turn the Cinema Reference on to a selected input via its remote control or from a control system.

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads TURNON INPUT and

press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob to select the desired turn-on component and then press the mode knob.

To exit the Setup Menu completely, turn the Volume knob.

Page 43

LCD Preview Display

The Cinema Reference Mach II features an LCD preview display (NTSC or PAL auto-detecting, for use outside the U.S.). The Out of the Box setup for the display is on. If you do not desire to see the preview display on, you can opt to turn it off. To do so:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads LCD PREVIEW and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob to select turn the LCD PREVIEW display to either IS ACTIVE or IS INAC-

TIVE and then press the mode knob. To exit the Setup Menu completely, turn the Volume knob.

There is an additional adjustment for the contrast of the LCD display that will raise or lower the displays brightness. This feature is useful but requires that a video signal be displayed in order for you to best adjust the LCD. Please note, that the LCD display only shows components that have a composite video signal connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II. On this issue it is important to point out, that some components (i.e. HD DSS receivers) do not output a composite video signal if they are also set to output HD (VGA/RGBHV).

Adjustment of the LCD will assist in correcting visual issues regarding ambient room light and angle of view. To adjust the contrast/brightness of the LCD preview display, press the small black buttons located to the right of the LCD preview monitor.

N

E

L

O

R

C

E

D

R

Illumination

The Cinema Reference Mach II permits you to adjust the brightness of the front panel not including the LCD preview monitor. This includes the labeling around the five control knobs, the input/output/mode lamps, and the two line alphanumeric display. The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box setup has this feature set to 100%. You can opt to set it to a specified value lower than 100% or to AUT O. In Auto, the Cinema Reference’s front panel electric eye will lower the intensity of these displays depending on room light. The darker the room becomes, the lower the levels go. To alter this setting to either AUTO or to an alternate percentage value:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads ILLUMINATION and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise to select AUTO or turn it counterclockwise to select a specific

percentage value. Then press the mode knob. To exit the Setup Menu completely , turn the Volume knob.

Page 44

Speaker Size Setup 1

Once you have your inputs configured properly, you will need to setup the Cinema Reference Mach II’s outputs which pass to your power amplifier and then the speakers. In this section, you will need to proceed with several steps that focus on the type of speaker you are using in your system.

The Cinema Reference Mach II uses the description of SMALL, LARGE, and NONE with respect to the speakers.

SMALL refers to speakers that are not designed to handle low frequencies. LARGE refers to speakers that are capable of playing low frequencies. NONE refers to that speaker not existing in your system (i.e. no back-center surround speakers)

There is another Cinema Reference feature that works in conjunction with SMALL settings called: SW CROSSOVER which refers the Sub Woofer crossover frequency point. The subwoofer crossover frequency point determines at which frequency the Small speakers bass

information is “rolled off” and sent to the subwoofer. Speakers that are set to Large are never rolled off. The crossover frequency point is fully adjustable on the Cinema Reference Mach II and is discussed in the tail end of this section.

What type of speakers are your using?

If you are using THX speakers, most such speaker designs are purposely engineered to not handle low frequencies because the subwoofer is providing all of the bass sound reinforcement. The typical crossover frequency point for THX speaker is 80Hz (Hertz). In a THX speaker system, all bass information below 80Hz intended for the left, center, right, surround left, surround right, back surround left, and back surround right speakers is redirected to the subwoofer and summed (combined) with the LFE (Low Frequency Effects or the “.1” in a 5.1 mix). As such, these speakers are rolled off at 80Hz.

If you have a mix of home theater speakers and full-range speakers (speakers that can handle bass), you can opt to set some speakers to the Large setting and other speakers to the Small setting.

The Cinema Reference groups speakers as such: the front left and right are one group, the center speaker is a second group, the surround left and right speakers are a third group, the back left and right surround speakers are fourth group, and subwoofer is a fifth group.

Prior to proceeding with the speaker setup for your system, here are a few considerations. a ADA generally recommends that all speakers are set to small for the optimum theater experi-

ence, even if some of your speakers are full range. This suggestion coincides with the understanding that your system contain at least one subwoofer and that it is a quality subwoofer. The reason behind this suggestion is based on two considerations. First, most bass information in film content is mixed into the front left and right channels as well as the “.1” LFE channel. By directing all of the bass information to the subwoofer, you will create a more theater-like experience. Second, the subwoofer control section of the Cinema Reference Mach II is extremely powerful, giving you extensive control of all bass information.

b While systems can be run in a phantom mode, where the center channel information is redi-

rected to the front right and left speakers, ADA strongly suggests that you utilize a center channel speaker in your system. As this channel handles mostly dialogue, it is an important speaker in your system.

Page 45

c When trying to decide what type of surround speakers to utilize, either dipole or directional

speakers, there is much discussion as to which will perform better with 5.1 digital source material. Some suggest placing directional speakers in the back left and right corners. While this will work, if you are also employing back-surround speakers in addition to left and right surround speakers, you will most likely have a better sound field with dipole speakers placed at the listening position slightly above head level. You can then opt for directional or dipole speakers for the back-surround channels.

d When employing back surround speakers, you will need to determine if you are using one or

two speakers. If the back wall of the theater is not very wide, you may opt to include a single speaker in the middle. If the rear wall is wide, you can include two speakers evenly spaced along the back wall. The Cinema Reference Mach II permits you to have two, one, or no backsurround speakers (and if they are large or small).

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box speaker setup has all speakers set to SMALL, all speakers are on including two back surround speakers, and the subwoofer ACTIVE. To alter any of these features:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click so that the display’s second line reads STEP 1 SPKRS

and press the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob to the desired speaker group (FRONT, CENTER, SURR, BACK, SUB)

and then press the Mode knob. To return to the previous Pro Setup menu level, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Mode knob.

5 Turn the Mode knob to select LARGE, SMALL, or NONE (FRONT does not have a NONE

option, BACK has large and small options for one or two speakers) and press the Mode knob.

6 Continue altering speaker size settings for all speaker groups. Note that the option for the

subwoofer is not large or small, but rather ACTIVE (if your system has a subwoofer or INACTIVE if your system does not have a subwoofer).

7 To return to the Pro Setup menu options, the second line of the display needs to read either

SPEAKER or SPKER. Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display reads BACK TO MAIN and then press the Mode knob. To exit the setup mode completely, turn the Volume knob.

At this time, the Cinema Reference Mach II is setup for your specific speaker system with respect to the number of speakers and their size.

Page 46

Subwoofer Crossover Point Setup

The Cinema Reference Mach II is permits you to set the subwoofer to best match the speakers in your system. While the THX crossover frequency point (roll off point) is 80Hz, some speakers my operate better with a slightly lower roll off and others with a slightly higher roll off. For example, ribbon speakers typically operate best at frequencies above 180Hz. ADA suggests consulting with the manufacturer of your home theater speakers prior to altering this setting. While the Cinema Reference Mach II’s factory default is the THX 80Hz setting, the range of the crossover is Off or 60Hz to 220Hz, in increments of 10Hz.

When setting the crossover , remember that it will affect only those speakers that are set to Small, as their bass information (below the crossover setting) will be summed with the LFE (“.1” effects channel) and be directed to the subwoofer .

To set the Subwoofer Crossover:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click so that the display’s second line reads SW CROSS-

OVER and press the Mode knob.

4 To turn the crossover completely off, turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display

reads FILTER OFF. Otherwise, turn the Mode knob until the display reads the desired crossover frequency point.

5 T o proceed with other Pro Setup options, press the Mode button. To completely exit the setup

menu, turn the Volume knob.

Page 47

Multi-Pin Speaker Setup

The Cinema Reference Mach II has a secondary Large/Small setting for multi-channel DVD Audio or SACD connections. This crossover applies only to the Multi-Pin (25 pin D connector) and takes place in the analog domain because the DVD Audio or SACD input completely bypasses the DSP and D/A convertors. As such, the crossover has more limited features than those internal to the DSP.

The Multi-Pin crossover frequency is fixed to 80Hz and offers four options; all speakers Small, all speakers Large, front right & left Large with others small, or front right and left small with all others large.

This feature is an important circuit in the Cinema Reference Mach II because unlike Dolby Digital or DTS decoding, where there is ample bass management, DVD Audio or SACD offers none. This is an extremely important issue because DVD Audio and SACD are mixed such that all channels output full range. When playing full range on a THX speaker system, the main speakers end up getting signals well below 80Hz. Furthermore, the subwoofer may also end up receiving a full range signal. This will result in an extremely poor sound field as speakers that are not designed to deliver bass have to do so while the subwoofer, designed just to play low frequencies, has to put out full range. As such, this aspect of the Cinema Reference Mach II makes it an ideal choice for those looking to add DVD Audio or SACD to their system.

While the standard speaker setup options, including the variable crossover frequency point, apply to all input labels set to track either analog or digital audio inputs, the Multi-Pin speaker setting is independent and only is activated for input labels that are linked to the Multi-Pin audio input. For example, if you are using full-range front and right speakers but setup these speakers as Small in the previous page for the best movie audio experience, you may opt to run these speakers as Large for the MultiPin input, as this input is designed to primarily play music from either DVD Audio or SACD discs.

The Cinema Reference’s Out of the Box Multi-Pin speaker setup is set to all speakers Small. To alter this:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads MUL TI-PIN and then press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob to select the desired speaker option as described above and then press

the Mode knob.

4 To exit the setup mode completely, turn the Volume knob.

At this time, you have set the Multi-Pin output to conform with your speaker system.

Page 48

2

Multi-Pin Input LFE Boost Switch

For the Multi-Pin input, the Cinema Reference Mach II has a special bass setting that will permit you to increase (or decrease) the presence of the LFE (“.1”) channel by a differential of 10dB.

For the Multi-Pin input, speakers that are set to the Small option have their bass information below 80Hz summed with the LFE channel and sent to the subwoofer.

When the LFE gain switch is set to the left, the LFE is not boosted. As such, the LFE is summed with the bass information of all Small speakers and then sent to the subwoofer.

When the LFE gain switch is set to the right (+10dB), the LFE is first boosted by 10dB and is then summed with the bass information of all speakers set to Small. This enhanced LFE output is then sent to the subwoofer.

As you listen to multi-channel DVD Audio or SACD material, you may wish to either increase, or if already set to +10dB, decrease the bass output using this switch, rather than readjusting the bass levels for the DVD AUDIO input label.

Please note, that this should be a one time setting that is best performed while playing a DVD Audio or SACD signal through the system.

1

2

L

1

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

2

L

5

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

5

3

6

4

3

2

-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

T

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

C

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

MAIN 2

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

MAIN 2

OSD

6

S-VIDEO INPUTS

REC

SBL LS

L

78

R

OUT

O

13

1

41

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

115 V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

CINEMA REFERENCE MACH II H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

Y

4

O

UTPUT

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

123

3

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

G

ND

REC

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

1

41

3

2

L

MAIN

R

RS

POINTS

Y

C

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

1

2

3

Y

3

Page 49

Speaker Level Setup 2

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s next step involves the balancing of the speaker channels for the optimum home theater experience. This step permits you to make certain that the individual speaker levels are balanced appropriately . Prior to entering this step, you should already have completed the positioning of your speakers and programmed their size into the Cinema Reference Mach II.

The Cinema Reference Mach II has been calibrated in the factory for optimum operation. Thus you can at this time decide to run your system with just minor adjustments to the Master Volume Control (center knob).

However, since not all speaker configurations and rooms are the same, for correct setup you should adjust the channel balance (as well as the delay settings) to best suit your home theater system. If you are unfamiliar with the process of home theater level calibration and the use of an SPL meter (Sound Pressure Level meter), ADA strongly suggests contacting an Authorized ADA Dealer for assistance prior to proceeding.

The Cinema Reference Mach II features an internal Pink Noise generator which is used to determine the signal level to each speaker. In order to best proceed with the remainder of this section’s setup instructions, it is recommended that you use an SPL meter. Set your SPL meter to “C” weighted and “Slow”. The optimum SPL level should read 75 dB for each channel. Prior to entering this setup, please note that pink noise is a static type sound that will not harm your speakers and is used strictly for level calibration. To begin this setup:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads STEP 2 LEVEL and press

the Mode knob.

4 The displays second line will read NOISE LEFT and you will now hear pink noise coming from

just the Left channel. T urn on your SPL meter to the 70dB range, Slow , C Weighted setting. Sit in your listening position and hold the meter at comfortable arms length, pointed upwards. If the meter is reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the left channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

5 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE CENTER. If the meter

is reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the center channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

6 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE RIGHT. If the meter is

reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the right channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE R SURR. If the meter

is reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the right surround channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

Page 50

8 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE R BACK. If the meter is

reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the right back-surround channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

9 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE L BACK. If the meter is

reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the left back-surround channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

10 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE L SURR. If the meter is

reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the left surround channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

11 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE SUB. If the meter is

reading 75dB, proceed to the next step. If the reading is not on 75dB, press the Mode knob to adjust the subwoofer channel’s level up or down so that the meter reads 75dB. When completed press the Mode knob.

At this time you have calibrated the pink noise to THX specifications. To quickly review all channel levels:

12 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display reads NOISE SEQ. At this time, the

noise will automatically sequence through all channels permitting you to focus on the SPL meter and verify that the levels are even to each other.

13 To return to the previous setup menu level, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s

second line reads BACK T O MAIN and then press the Mode knob. To exit the setup menu completely, turn the Volume knob.

Page 51

Balance Presets

The Cinema Reference Mach II features four balance presets which store the channel levels settings. At this time, with the channel balance settings in place, ADA strongly suggests storing Balance Preset

1. This will preserve the work you have just completed in Speaker Level Setup 2 . To proceed: 1 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display reads RECALL/STORE BAL PRESETS. Do

not stop on the option PUSH RECALLS BAL PRESET 1. If you are on this option and then press the Channel knob, you will recall the ADA factory settings and erase the calibration

you just performed under Speaker Level Setup 2. 2 With the display reading RECALL/STORE BAL PRESETS, press the Channel knob. 3 The display will now read RECALL BAL PRESET 1. Do not press the Channel knob. 4 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display reads STORE BAL PRESET 1. Now press

the Channel knob to store your presets. The display will briefly indicate STORED. 5 T o continue with other Preset setup features, turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s

second line reads BACK TO MAIN and then press the Channel knob. To exit this setup

menu entirely, turn the Volume knob.

At this time you have successfully stored the previous adjustments in Speaker Level Setup 2. To recall Balance Preset 1 at any time:

1 Turn the Channel knob until the display reads PUSH RECALLS BAL PRESET 1 and then

press the Channel knob.

As mentioned, the Cinema Reference features four Balance Presets that can be recalled from the units front panel, a remote control, or a control system. While Balance Preset 1 is used almost exclusively for all film playback, the additional three Balance Presets can be used to store alternate channel levels. For example, if additional rear channel level is desired for less enveloping sound tracks, one can store an alternate balance preset that is stored with a slightly higher level for the surround channels. Alternately, when viewing film material in the evening, when the normal bass levels might be to loud, disturbing other members of the household who might be sleeping, a balance preset could be created in which the subwoofer is slightly lower than that during normal operation. This flexibility gives you the power to contour balances between speakers and easily recall them.

Page 52

Delay Level Setup 3

FRONT (LEFT)

FRONT (RIGHT)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SUR. (RIGHT)

12 Ft

17 Ft

8 Ft

7 Ft

9 Ft9 Ft

15 Ft

10 Ft

BACK SUR.

SUR. (LEFT)

The adjustment of the Delay setting can be configured independently for each of the Cinema Reference Mach II’s eight channels (including the subwoofer channel). The goal of setting channel delays is to have the sound from each speaker reach the primary seating position at the same time or perhaps better put, the correct time. Since the Cinema Reference Mach II can delay the signal of a channel from reaching that channel’s output (and as such, the amplifier , then the speaker , and then your ears), the delay is applied to all speakers that are closer to the listener than the furthest speaker. This speaker, the one at the greatest distance from the primary listening/viewing position, for the sake of this section, will be called the “Reference Speaker”, because all of the other speakers closer to the listening position will use this speaker’s distance as a reference point.

The process of setting the delays will require the use of a tape measure or some other distance measuring instrument. ADA suggests using the U.S./British standard to measure these distances in feet as sound travels at approximately 1 foot per millisecond (1/100th of a second). If you are using the metric standard to measure your distances, ADA suggests converting all measurements to feet as it will be easier to calibrate the delay time settings (1 foot is approximately equal to 30.5 cm).

The example details an extreme sample speaker placement where each speaker is located at a different distance from the primary seating position. The chart below is filled in with the sample distances from diagram.

ENTER DISTANCE

OF FURTHEST

(REFERENCE

SPEAKER)

ENTER DISTANCE

OF EACH SPEAKER

SUBTRACT

SPEAKER'S

DISTANCE FROM

REFERENCE

SPEAKER

FRONT LEFT CENTER

17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

171215108799

052791088

FRONT

RIGHT

SUBWOOFER

LEFT

SURROUND

RIGHT

SURROUND

LEFT BACK SURROUND

RIGHT BACK

SURROUND

THESE ARE THE

SPEAKER'S

DELAY SETTINGS

Page 53

To proceed, you will first determine where your primary listening viewing seating position will be. Next you will want to measure the distance from the primary listening/viewing position each speaker using a tape measure. Your measurements need to be accurate to within 1 foot. Use can use the accompanying blank chart to fill in your speaker distances. Once you have filled in the speaker distances on the second line, take the highest value distance and insert it into the top row of each speaker column. Then subtract the distance of the speaker from the distance of the Reference Speaker . The end value (in feet) is the distance value for the delay setting for that speaker.

ENTER DISTANCE

OF FURTHEST

SPEAKER

(REFERENCE

SPEAKER)

ENTER DISTANCE

OF EACH SPEAKER

SUBTRACT

SPEAKER'S

DISTANCE FROM

REFERENCE

SPEAKER

FRONT LEFT CENTER

FRONT

RIGHT

SUBWOOFER

LEFT

SURROUND

RIGHT

SURROUND

LEFT BACK SURROUND

RIGHT BACK

SURROUND

THESE ARE THE

SPEAKER'S

DELAY SETTINGS

With the distance information collected, you can now proceed to calibrate the Cinema Reference Mach II using the steps below. The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box delay settings have all delays set to 0 Feet.

Please note, at least one channel needs to remain at a delay setting of 0 Feet. If you apply a delay distance to each channel, you will cause the Cinema Reference’s DSP to loose the delay reference point. It is extremely important that at least one delay distance point remain at 0.

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads STEP 3 DELAY and press

the Mode knob. 4 The display will indicate DELA Y LEFT . If the left channel is the at the furthest distance from the

seating area, you will not need to delay this channel. To proceed to delay other channels,

turn the Mode knob to the next channel you need to adjust and proceed with the steps

below. To return to the previous setup menu level, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the

display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Mode knob. To completely exit

the setup mode at any time, turn the Volume knob. 5 When the display’s second line displays a channel whose delay you need to set, press the

Mode knob. 6 Turn the Mode knob to the appropriate delay distance noted in Feet. When completed, press

the Mode knob. 7 Turn the Mode knob to the next channel requiring a delay setting and press the Mode knob. 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all channel delays have been appropriately set. Remember to

leave the speaker at the greatest distance from the listening area to a delay setting of 0

Feet. When completed, turn the Volume knob to exit the setup mode.

Page 54

Bass Setup 4

The Cinema Reference provides you with the ability to engage a Bass Peak Limit Manager that operates in a range from 0 dB (decibels) to -24 dB. The function of the Bass Peak Limit Manager is to reduce the possibility of overloading the subwoofer in cases of extreme volume and/or software that provides extremely dynamic bass information. If your subwoofer is capable of providing a large level of bass without bottoming out, you may not need to engage the Bass Peak Limit Manager. If however , you play your system at volume levels that, on occasion, will cause your subwoofer to play distorted audio segments, you will wish to engage the Bass Peak Limit Manager. The Cinema Reference’s “Out Of The Box” setup has the Bass Peak Limit Manager , also known as the Bass Limiter , set to -24dB, the THX reference. There are two different ways in which to set the Bass Limiter on the Cinema Reference Mach II, using either a pink noise or using actual playback material. The first is described in this segment and the latter in the segment below.

The Bass Peak Limit Manager has a range with the options of OFF or -24 dB up to 0 dB. The range operates as such: As an example, assume that the Bass Peak Limit Manager is set to -12dB. During operation, as the Master Volume Level is raised and goes above -12 dB, the volume of the subwoofer channel will stop rising. As such, regardless of how loud the sound system gets (-11 dB all the way to +10 dB), the bass level will never exceed -12 dB bass limit. To turn off or adjust the Bass Peak Limit Manager using test tones:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads STEP 4 BASS and press

the Mode knob.

4 The pink noise will play through the subwoofer and the display will indicate the current set-

tings. To change the settings, turn the Mode knob. To turn the limiter completely off, turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display reads LIMITER OFF.

5 Press the Mode knob to exit this setup menu. Turn the Volume knob to completely exit the

setup menu.

Bass Limiter

The BASS LIMITER under Pro Setup is manual and does not provide any subwoofer noise (as in Noise Test). To set the Bass Peak Limit Manager in this manner requires that you listen to your subwoofer for distortion. You can use either STEP 4 BASS or BASS LIMITER to dial in the desired Bass Peak Limit Manager level or to turn it completely off. You do not need to use both methods, as adjusting one, will affect the other. To set the Bass Peak Limit Manager using no test tones:

1 While in the Pro Setup menu, turn the MODE knob clockwise until the display reads BASS

LIMITER and then press the MODE knob. The Cinema Reference’s display will read BASS LIMITER on the top line and the second line will read OFF or LIM and a number (-24 to 0 dB).

2 Turn the MODE knob gradually and stop just prior to the subwoofer distorting. You can also

turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display reads LIMITER OFF.

3 Press the Mode knob to exit this setup menu. Turn the Volume knob to completely exit the

setup menu.

Page 55

THX Ultra Setup 5

The Cinema Reference permits the adjustment of features that are specific to THX Ultra 2. These two elements include Boundary Gain settings and Advanced Speaker Array settings.

Boundary Gain Control (BGC)

When the chosen listening room layout (for practical or esthetic reasons) results in the listener being too close to the rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes “boomy”. Boundary Gain Compensation (BCG) can be switched on to restore the correct bass performance.

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads STEP 5 THX and press the

Mode knob. 4 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads BOUNDRY GAIN and press the

Mode knob. 5 Turn the Mode knob to turn Boundry Gain (BNDRY GN) ON or OFF and then press the Mode

knob. Continue below.

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

The optimum blend of ambient and rear directional information provides an enhanced surround experience over a wider listening area for all multi-channel formats. With stereo surround tracks and multichannel music,, the signal is fed unprocessed to the left and right surrounds and, after further processing, to the surround back speakers. This processing uses THX ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) Technology and provides an enveloping rear surround field over a wide listening area. The adjustment to the ASA is based on three settings; if the two back surround speakers are less than 12 inches apart, if they are between 12 and 48 inches apart, or if they are greater than 48 inches apart. To set the ASA for your system.

1 If you are still in the STEP 5 THX setup menu from the above step, turn the Mode knob until the

display reads ADJ SPKR AR Y (Adjust Speaker Array), then press the Mode knob. If you are

not in the STEP 5 THX setup menu, follow the instructions from step 1 in the section above. 2 Turn the MODE knob to select between ASA < 12” (ASA less than 12 inches), ASA 12”-48”

(ASA between 12 and 48 inches), and ASA > 48” (ASA greater than 48 inches). Then press

the Mode knob. 3 T o return to other Pro Setup features, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second

line reads BACK TO MAIN and then press the Mode knob. To completely exit the setup

menu, turn the Volume knob.

Page 56

DTS LFE Settings

The Cinema Reference permits the adjustment of the DTS LFE level prior to the summing of the bass information from all speakers that are set to small. This LFE level adjustment applies only to DTS decoding modes. When listening to DTS encoded software, you may notice a preponderance of bass as compared to non-DTS material. Based on laboratory testing, ADA has determined that some DTS material has an increased LFE level of 10dB. As such, the Cinema Reference Mach II offers a setup feature that permits you to minimize the LFE signal from DTS encoded material. With this feature enabled, as you change between DTS and non-DTS decoding, you will not need to make on-going adjustments to your systems bass and subwoofer settings.

The Out of the Box setup for this feature is turned off (FLA T). In order for this setting to take effect, you must first Enable the feature as outlined in the first section on this page, DTS LFE Adjustment Enable. You can then proceed with the second section on this page, DTS LFE Adjustment. The range of this adjustment is from -20dB to 0db. The Out of the Box configuration for DTS LFE Adjustment is -10dB. If you are planning on making an adjustment to the DTS LFE level, ADA recommends doing so while playing a DTS encoded source with the Cinema Reference Mach II in a DTS mode. While enabling this feature and setting the level to 0dB are in effect the same as setting the Enable option from on (ATTN) to off (FLAT), the concept of offering a single on/off function, without changing the underlying level, permits the creation of on/off buttons on controls and touch screens. As such, the actual level control remains untouched.

DTS LFE Adjustment Enable

To engage the DTS LFE Attenuation Adjustment:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and then

press the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads DTS LFE ENBL and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob so that the display’s second line reads DTS LFE ATTN if you wish this

filter to be on. To turn this feature off, turn the Mode kob so that the display reads DTS LFE FLAT.

5 If you selected DTS LFE ATTN, when DTS decoding takes place, the LFE will be lowered by

10dB (Out of the Box setting) prior to the summing of bass information from all the speakers that are set to small. To adjust the actual DTS LFE level, proceed with the steps below. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

DTS LFE Adjustment

The Out of the Box configuration for DTS LFE Adjustment is -10dB. To change this setting:

6 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads DTS LFE ADJ and

press the Mode knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob to set the desired level for the LFE and then press the Mode knob. Please

note, that you may wish to be listening to a DTS source while making this adjustment.

8 Press the Mode knob to continue with other Pro Setup options. To completely exit the setup

menu, turn the Volume knob.

Page 57

Tone Controls

In a perfectly acoustic room environment, a THX system (electronics and speakers) would not require any tone control, as the film experience would be delivered across a controlled system, providing a sound field as intended by the film maker. However, in the real world, no room is acoustically perfect. Even in a high-end custom home theater , where special attention has been paid to the room’s acous- tics, there will still be subtle acoustical issues which will benefit from some slight level of tone control.

The Cinema Reference permits the adjustment of bass and treble levels in what is best described as a parametric tone control, because in addition to setting a level (in dB) for bass and treble, you can also adjust the frequency point for bass and the frequency point for treble. This is a critical feature of the Cinema Reference Mach II, as the tone control takes place in the DSP.

The Cinema Reference also features two tone groups (A & B), where each individual speaker can be assigned to either group A, B, both A & B, or to neither group. The premise for the two tone groups allows you to group like speakers together in two distinct groups, where levels and frequency points are aligned to best contour the speakers. In a THX speaker system, the front right, front center, and front left speakers are typically similar in size, driver configuration, etc,. The same is true for the surround speakers, as they too are typically the same size, driver configuration, etc. As such, you may opt to set the front speakers to group A and the surround speakers to group B. As each group provides a for a unique Bass Frequency & Level and Treble Frequency & Level, you have significant control over the Cinema Reference Mach II’s acoustics and as such, the power to correct deficiencies in the room’s acoustics.

While Tone presets are discussed in the next section, it is important to note that the Cinema Reference Mach II features four tone presets. Not only do these presets store the frequency and levels of each group, but they also store the speakers assigned to the various groups. As such, you can create some tone presets more ideal for film playback, while other tone presets can be recalled that might be more pleasing for music playback. ADA strongly suggests storing tone presets as you proceed with these adjustments, to preserve the calibrations performed while permitting you to experiment with alternate configurations. As a point of information, Tone Preset 1 is easily recalled under the Channel knob. The other three Tone presets require additional maneuvering, also under the Channel knob.

Tone Presets - Out of the Box

ADA has designed four tone presets as shown in the chart below . These Tone Presets may be useful to you as you select to customize your home theater with tone control. As such, you may actually skip the Speaker Group setup entirely by first recalling one of these four presets. Please note, that while the presets do have frequency settings in place, all levels are set flat to 0dB. At the very least, you will need to adjust the levels to hear any effect these presets may have on improving your home theater sound.

GROUP A SPEAKER GROUP A TREB A TREB A BASS A BASS A

(X=SPKR ACTIVE) C S L R SL SR BL BR FREQ LEVEL FREQ LEVEL

TONE PRESET 1 XXXXXXXX 6KHZ 0DB 260HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 2 X-XX---- 12KHZ 0DB 120HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 3 --XX---- 12KHZ 0DB 120HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 4 X- XXXXXX 12KHZ 0DB 120HZ 0DB

GROUP B SPEAKER GROUP B TREB B TREB B BASS B BASS B

(X=SPKR ACTIVE) C S L R SL SR BL BR FREQ LEVEL FREQ LEVEL

TONE PRESET 1 -------- 6KHZ 0DB 260HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 2 ----XXXX 8KHZ 0DB 180HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 3 X- - - XXXX 8KHZ 0DB 180HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 4 X- XXXXXX 8KHZ 0DB 180HZ 0DB

Page 58

The thinking behind these four presets is: Tone Preset 1 - All speakers are active to only Speaker Group A. Here, one can simply adjust levels

up and down for bass and treble, effecting all speakers. Tone Preset 2 - The front three speakers are on Group A (where the center channel is more similar in

size, driver configuration, etc. to the front right and left speakers) and the surround speakers are on Group B. Note that the front speakers have different frequency points and that the subwoofer is not active in either Speaker Group.

Tone Preset 3 - Only the front right and left speakers are on Group B. This setup takes into consideration a system where the center speaker is more similar in size, driver configuration, etc. to the surround speakers. Note that the front speakers have different frequency points and that the subwoofer is not active in either Speaker Group.

Tone Preset 4 - Here all speakers are active on both Tone Groups A and B, which also have different frequency points. As such, this option sets the tone control section up as a four band parametric equalizer. The subwoofer is not active in either Speakers Group.

Please note, that the primary preset and current Cinema Reference Mach II setting is Tone Preset 1. Here all speakers are assigned to Group A with a Treble frequency point of 6KHz and a Bass frequency point of 260Hz. Both Treble and Bass levels are defaulted to flat (0dB). As the remote control may offer a Bass and Treble up/down function, these buttons will of fer a uniform bass and treble control across all speakers.

If you are interested in the adjustment of the tone levels, ADA suggests first trying the three additional presets shown above. You will want to listen to an actual source component when doing this. If you prefer to assign either Tone Presets 2, 3, or 4 to Tone Preset number 1 (thereby erasing the current Tone Preset 1), you can do so. This is discussed under Storing Tone Presets.

If you choose to use one of these presets as a basis for setting tone levels in your home theater, thereby skipping the Speaker Group setup, continue with the next section, Recalling Tone Presets.

Recalling Tone Presets

To recall the Tone Preset 1:

1 Turn the Channel knob until the display reads PUSH RECALLS TONE PRESET 1 and then

press the Channel knob.

To recall any of the four Tone Presets:

1 Turn the Channel knob until the display reads RECALL/STORE TONE PRESETS and press

the Channel knob.

2 Turn the Channel knob so that the display’s top line reads RECALL while the second line reads

the TONE PRESET number you wish to recall and then press the Channel knob.

At this time, you can choose to modify the Speaker Groupings or skip directly to Treble and Bass adjustment.

Page 59

Speaker Groups

In this section, we will determine which speakers are in Group A and which speakers are in Group B. Please note, that there are no set rules here. A speaker can be disengaged from both groups so that it is not effected at all by any tone control. Alternately, speakers can be engaged to both tone groups. Here you can set the frequency points for treble and bass to different values (as well as different levels), providing a four-band tone equalizer. As such, you will want to give some thought to this feature prior to randomly proceeding. To include/exclude speakers from the tone groups.

1 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads TONE GROUP A and

then press the Channel knob. 2 The top line of the display will indicate a channel (speaker) and if it is IN or OUT of Tone Group

A. To include or exclude this speaker from Tone Group A, press the Channel knob. 3 Turn the Channel knob clockwise one click so that the top line of the display moves to the next

channel. Again press the Channel knob to either include or exclude this channel from Tone

Group A. 4 Repeat step 3 for all channels in T one Group A. To return to the previous menu option, turn the

Channel clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN. T o completely exit

this setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 5 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads TONE GROUP B and

then press the Channel knob. 6 The top line of the display will indicate a channel (speaker) and if it is IN or OUT of Tone Group

B. To include or exclude this speaker from Tone Group B, press the Channel knob. 7 Turn the Channel knob clockwise one click so that the top line of the display moves to the next

channel. Again press the Channel knob to either include or exclude this channel from Tone

Group B. 8 Repeat step 7 for all channels in T one Group B. T o return to the previous menu option, turn the

Channel clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN. T o completely exit

this setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

FRONT (LEFT)

CENTER

SPEAKER

GROUP A

FRONT (RIGHT)

FRONT (LEFT)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT (RIGHT)

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKER

GROUP B

Page 60

SUR. (LEFT)

BACK SUR.

SUR. (RIGHT)

SUR. (LEFT)

BACK SUR.

SUR. (RIGHT)

Treble Group A

In this section, we will set the Treble Level and Frequency point for Treble Group A.

1 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads TREB GROUP A and

then press the Channel knob.

2 The top line of the display will read TREB GROUP A and the second line will display the LEVEL

in DB. To skip the Level adjustment and move directly to adjustment of the treble frequency , skip to step 3. To adjust the T reble Level, press the Channel knob and then dial in the level you desire using the Channel knob (-20dB to +20dB). When set, press the Channel knob.

3 Turn the Channel knob one click such that the display’s top line reads TREB GROUP A and the

second line reads FREQ in K HZ. To skip the Frequency adjustment and move directly to adjustment of Bass Group A, skip to step 4. To adjust the Treble Frequency, press the Channel knob and then dial in the frequency you desire using the Channel knob (1KHz to 30KHz). When set, press the Channel knob.

4 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and

press the Channel knob.

Bass Group A

In this section, we will set the Bass Level and Frequency point for Bass Group A.

5 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BASS GROUP A and

then press the Channel knob.

6 The top line of the display will read BASS GROUP A and the second line will display the LEVEL

in DB. To skip the Level adjustment and move directly to adjustment of the bass frequency , skip to step 7. To adjust the BASS Level, press the Channel knob and then dial in the level you desire using the Channel knob (-20dB to +20dB). When set, press the Channel knob.

7 Turn the Channel knob one click such that the display’s top line reads BASS GROUP A and the

second line reads FREQ in HZ. To skip the Frequency adjustment and move directly to adjustment of Treble Group b, skip to step 8. To adjust the Bass Frequency, press the Channel knob and then dial in the frequency you desire using the Channel knob (20Hz to 980Hz). When set, press the Channel knob.

8 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and

press the Channel knob.

Treble Group B

In this section, we will set the Treble Level and Frequency point for Treble Group B.

9 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads TREB GROUP B and

then press the Channel knob.

10 The top line of the display will read TREB GROUP B and the second line will display the

LEVEL in DB. To skip the Level adjustment and move directly to adjustment of the treble frequency , skip to step 1 1. To adjust the T reble Level, press the Channel knob and then dial in the level you desire using the Channel knob (-20dB to +20dB). When set, press the Channel knob.

Page 61

1 1 Turn the Channel knob one click such that the display’s top line reads TREB GROUP B and the

second line reads FREQ in K HZ. To skip the Frequency adjustment and move directly to

adjustment of Bass Group B, skip to step 12. To adjust the Treble Frequency, press the

Channel knob and then dial in the frequency you desire using the Channel knob (1KHz to

30KHz). When set, press the Channel knob. 12 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and

press the Channel knob.

Bass Group B

In this section, we will set the Bass Level and Frequency point for Bass Group A.

13 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BASS GROUP B and

then press the Channel knob. 14 The top line of the display will read BASS GROUP B and the second line will display the LEVEL

in DB. To skip the Level adjustment and move directly to adjustment of the bass frequency ,

skip to step 15. To adjust the BASS Level, press the Channel knob and then dial in the level

you desire using the Channel knob (-20dB to +20dB). When set, press the Channel knob. 15 Turn the Channel knob one click such that the display’s top line reads BASS GROUP B and the

second line reads FREQ in HZ. To skip the Frequency adjustment and move directly to

storing these settings in a Tone Preset, skip to step 16. T o adjust the Bass Frequency , press

the Channel knob and then dial in the frequency you desire using the Channel knob (20Hz to

980Hz). When set, press the Channel knob. 16 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and

press the Channel knob.

Storing Tone Presets

In this section, we will set store the Speaker Groups, Treble adjustments, and Bass adjustments in a T one Preset. Remember that when you Store a Tone Preset, it will overwrite the original Out of the Box (or previous) Tone Preset settings.

17 Turn the Channel knob counterclockwise until the display reads RECALL/STORE T ONE PRE-

SETS and press the Channel knob. 18 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the top line reads STORE. With the top line of the

display reading STORE, turn the Channel knob and select a TONE PRESET number. Then

press the Channel knob to store the Speaker Groups and Tone Adjustments on this Tone

Preset #. Please note, that this will replace the current settings for this Tone Preset. 19 To completely exit RECALL/STORE TONE PRESETS menu, turn the Volume knob.

Page 62

Volume Setups

Once all of the system features have been set, you can proceed to set volume related features on the Cinema Reference Mach II. The order for these settings is specific. Follow the steps below in order to best setup the Cinema Reference Mach II.

Storing Volume Presets

The Cinema Reference Mach II features four volume presets. These are easily stored and can be used to quickly recall different volume levels depending on how loud you want the system to play . One way to recall a V olume preset is to set a one of the four V olume Presets as the T urn On V olume Level. Whenever the Cinema Reference is turned on, this V olume Preset will be recalled. Volume Presets 1 and 2 can be easily recalled under the Channel. All volume presets can be recalled in a slightly more involved manner, also under the channel. All four volume presets can also be programmed into a remote control or control system for one button recall.

1 To store a Volume Preset, first engage the system to a playing input and adjust the volume

using the Master Volume Control.

2 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display reads RECALL/STORE VOL PRESETS and

press the Channel knob.

3 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s top line reads STORE while the second

line reads the VOL PRESET number you wish to store the volume level on and press the Channel knob.

4 Turn the Volume knob to exit this setup menu.

At this time you have stored a Volume Preset. You can now repeat these steps for other Volume Presets.

Recalling Volume Presets

To recall Volume Presets 1 or 2:

1 Turn the Channel knob until the display reads PUSH RECALLS VOL PRESET 1 or PUSH

RECALLS VOL PRESET 2 and press the Channel knob. To recall any Volume Preset: 1 Turn the Channel knob until the display reads RECALL/STORE VOL PRESETS and press the

Channel knob. 2 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s top line reads RECALL while the second

line reads the VOL PRESET number you wish to recall and press the Channel knob.

Turn-On Volume Level Setup

The Cinema Reference features a Turn-On Volume Level which is engaged every time the Cinema Reference is first turned on. The Turn-On Volume level is based on one of the four Volume Presets. You can also opt to use the alternate setting, Last Used, which is also the Out of the Box setting. To change the Turn On Volume from Last Used to a specific Volume Preset level:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob.

Page 63

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads TURNON VOL and press

the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob to select either LASTUSE or RECALL1 through RECALL4. 4 Turn the Volume knob to completely exit the setup menu.

Maximum Volume Level

The Cinema Reference Mach II also permits you to set the systems Maximum Volume Level. This will prevent the system from ever playing too loud, averting distortion or damage to the speakers. The Out of the Box default setting is left wide-open to the maximum available +31.5dB level.

1 To set this level it is advised to play an input (digital) and test the system to determine the

loudest level you ever wish the system to play at, note this volume level, and then lower the

Master Volume control. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads VOLUME MAX and press

the Mode knob. 4 Turn the Mode knob counterclockwise to the level that your noted in step 1. 5 Turn the Volume knob to completely exit the setup menu.

Analog Gain

As you change from digital input labels to analog input labels, often the volume level may vary. The Cinema Reference features an Analog Input Gain control that can be set individually per input labels linked to analog audio inputs. Here you can alter the level of analog input between -10dB and +10dB. The Out of the Box setting for all input labels is 0dB (or no gain). To assist you in making certain that the level selected is optimal, the Cinema Reference will prompt you if the gain level is causing clipping.

1 To set this level you will first need to select the analog component and engage it into play. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and then

press the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads ANALOG GAIN and press

the Mode knob. 4 If the component you are playing is louder when compared to digital components, lower the

Analog Gain level by turning the Mode knob counterclockwise. If the component is playing

softer than digital components, slowly raise the analog gain by turning the Mode knob clock-

wise. If you raise this level too high, the display will indicate clipping. ADA suggests lower-

ing the gain so that clipping does not occur. 5 Turn the Input knob to exit the setup menu. Select another analog input label and repeat steps

2-4.

Page 64

Channel Volume Adjustment

The Cinema Reference also permits you to adjust volume levels of specific channels while you are listening to a component. This will allow you to for example, raise the center channel volume level, if the movie you are watching has dialogue that is not loud enough.

To access any of the eight channels and raise or lower their levels:

1 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PUSH TO EDIT while

the top line indicates the channel you can select and its current volume level in DB. Then

press the Channel knob. 2 Turn the Channel knob to raise or lower the channel’s volume level. 3 T o proceed to alter other channel levels, press the Channel knob, then turn the Channel knob

to the next channel you wish to alter and press the Channel knob to repeat step 2. To exit

this menu, turn any knob other than the Channel knob.

Solo Mode

The Cinema Reference Mach II features a testing mode that is unique to ADA. Solo Mode permits you to have just one speaker playing while all other channels are muted. In order to achieve this on lesser preamps, you would need to lower the level of all channels and then raise just the channel you wish to hear. In Solo Mode, you can select just one channel and easily switch between single channels.

Solo Mode is useful when trying to determine if you have a damaged speaker or driver. It is also useful for determining if a speaker is out of phase with the other speakers.

Solo Mode is also ideal when trying to get an understanding of how multi-channel recordings are mixed, as you can select to listen to just one channel at a time. This is particularly useful when playing multi-channel music recordings.

T o fully understand the use of Solo Mode and the power of multi-channel music, ADA suggests playing the DTS version of the Eagles “Hell Freezes Over” CD or DVD. The DTS version of these discs contains a bonus track, “Seven Bridges Road”. Please note, that this is a 5.1 mix and not a 7.1 mix. As such, it is best to select a DTS playback mode that leaves the back surrounds off, at least for a Solo Mode test. In this powerful mix, each of the Eagles band members is recorded on his own speaker channel; five band members hence the five channels.

Begin to listen to the track and about halfway through, return to the beginning and enter the Solo Mode. As you skip through the various channels, you will notice just how discrete each vocalist is. As you return to playing all channels at once, you will have realized firsthand, the power of multi-channel music as the harmonies on this recording are blending, not in some mixing console, but live, in your home theater.

To activate Solo Mode:

1 Turn the Channel knob clockwise until the display reads PUSH TO EDIT SOLO MODE, then

press the Channel knob. 2 Turn the Channel knob to select the channel you wish to isolate and listen to. To return to the

previous menu level, turn the Channel knob clockwise until the second line of the display

reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Channel knob. To completely exit this setup menu,

turn any knob other than Channel.

Page 65

RS-232 Control Options

O

D

-

The Cinema Reference Mach II is capable of being fully controlled via RS-232, providing status feedback of all preamplifier aspects. This makes the Cinema Reference Mach II ideal for integration with advanced control systems. It also permits the Cinema Reference Mach II to be setup and controlled from its custom PC software setup and test program (Cinema Ref. II PCOS).

ADA Bus Data Port

The primary two-way data port on the Cinema Reference Mach II is the four-pin screw terminal (ADA Bus) port on the back of the unit. Here, pin 1 is the ground

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

12VDC

100mA Ma

DC 1 1- 2+

terminal and pin 4 provides power (+15-24VDC). Pin three is the control input (In or

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

RX), taking control signals from external devices for operating functions on the

DC

Cinema Reference Mach II. Pin two provides feedback output (Out or TX).

ISO-232 ADA Bus to RS-232 Wired I/O Device

When connecting to a control system (touch-screen based system), you will require an ADA Bus to RS-232 convertor box, ADA’s ISO-232. This device not only permits two-way RS-232 communication but it also incorporates isolation, preventing ground loops in the control system from imposing noise into the Cinema Reference Mach II. The ISO-232’s two jumper pins need to be in the horizontal Normal position for communication to occur.

ISO-232

RS-232

Normal

Reverse

(TuneBase)

ADA BUS

1 2 3 4

RS-232 Connection & Settings

When only a Cinema Reference Mach II is connected to a control system, the ISO-232 plugs directly into the back of the Cinema Reference Mach II. The control system connects its RS-232 output to the ISO-232 using a straight-through 9-pin D type connector. Do not use a null-modem cable. The Cinema Reference Mach II’s communication settings are: 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, No Parity with either a 1200 or 19200 Baud Rate.

1

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

1

2

1

VIDEO INPUTS

3

4

L

2

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

6

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

REC

OSD

L

5

R

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

MAIN 2

6

VIDEO OUT

1

2

To RS-232 Control System or AMX or

Crestron Control System

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

REC

SBL LS

L

78

R

3

MAIN

RS

113

2514

Y

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

9-Pin D

RS-232 Cable

(Straight-Through)

POINTS

2341

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

RS-232

OPTICAL INPUTS

COMPONENT VIDEO

3

Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

3

2

ISO-232

ADA BUS

Normal

Reverse

(TuneBase)

Y

O

UTPUT

4

1 2 3 4

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

P

123

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

L

R

DATA PORT

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

AC VOLTAGE

OUT

Serial Data

O

UT

I

N

115 V

12

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

4 Condutor 18 Gauge ADA Bus Wire

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse

115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

Page 66

RS-232 Connection with Other ADA Bus Systems/Components

When a Cinema Reference Mach II is connected to a control system that is also controlling an ADA multi-room system (i.e. Suite-16), a single ISO-232 can be used to communicate to several ADA components including the Cinema Reference Mach II. Here the important consideration is to make certain that all ADA components are set to the same baud rate.

Cinema Reference Mach II

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

7

1

4

6

8

2

LRL

L

2

3

1

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

4

5

R

LINE-DOUBLED

EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/-CHAN 1 / 14LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15CT 8 / 21SBR 3 / 16RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

OSD

SBL LS

L

78

6

R

Trinity Triple Tuner

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

2341

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

COMPONENT VIDEO

INPUTS

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

115 V

H

RECORD

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤ 1 2 3 4

G

ND

OUT

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

ADA NET“

DC 2 1- 2+

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

P

R

123

4

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

MADE IN U.S.A.

AVERTISSEMENT!

CAUTION

DO NOT OPEN

NE PAS OUVRIR

WARNING!

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

AC INPUT

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

To Any

Open

IRL-5000

Set to Address 1

For Sources 1-8

IRL-5000

Set to Address 2

For Sources 9-16

To RS-232 Control System or AMX or

Crestron Control System

To Aquarius Hard-Drive

CD Library or Escient

Tunebase Pro MK III

ADA Bus to RS-232 Converter

Suite 16 Multi-Room A/V System

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

L

R

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

L

1 2 3 4

Gnd Rx Tx +15V

ADA Bus®

ADA/232

RS-232 Pins

RS-232

2=Tx 3=Rx

ADA Bus

5=Com

IRL-5000

Source Controller

Power On/Off IR Macro

PGM DEL

CON ERR

R

Connect To Mainframe Source DC Triggers & ACC-48 AC Controllers

VIDEO INPUTS

13579111315

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

IR Repeating Only

40KHz IR Repeat

Repeater

Serial

Frequency

IR - Serial

Data Only

12345678Source Ports:

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Data/Carrier

IR Flasher=Remove Jumper Serial Direct=Insert Jumper

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

A-16

P-16

13579111315

V-16

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

EXPANSION PORTS

1

2 3

4 5

6 7

ADA Bus

8

To Any

Open

IR Repeating Only

1 2 3 4

Gnd Rx Tx +15V

ADA Bus®

ADA/232

RS-232 Pins

RS-232

2=Tx 3=Rx

ADA Bus

5=Com

IRL-5000

Source Controller

Power On/Off IR Macro

PGM DEL

CON ERR

40KHz IR Repeat

Data/Carrier

IR Flasher=Remove Jumper Serial Direct=Insert Jumper

Connect To Mainframe Source DC Triggers & ACC-48 AC Controllers

ISO-232

RS-232

ISO-232

RS-232

Reverse

(TuneBase)

Reverse

(TuneBase)

Frequency

12345678Source Ports:

ADA BUS

Normal

ADA BUS

Normal

1 2 3 4

1

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

Repeater

Serial

IR - Serial

Data Only

Norm Invert

Off

2 3

4 5

6 7

8

WH-2000

ADA Bus

Jumper J2 to J1

ADA Bus

ISO-232

To Any

Open

Input Triggers

In 1-8

A-16 • Audio Input Module

Balanced

In 7/15

In 8/16

In 6/14

Audio Page

In 5/13

Gnd

Input (600Ω)

In 1/9

In 4/12

1

In 2/10

In 3/11

Com

In 9-16

+12VDC Outputs

Paging Input/Trigger

Zones 1- 6 & 7-12

Zones 1-6

P-16 • Preamplifier Module

Zones 13-16

TO PTM-1225/1260

In 6/12

Gnd

In 5/11

+12VDC Output

In 1/7

In 4/10

Gnd

In 2/8

In 3/9

(-)13(+)14(+)15(+)16(+)

Zones 7-12

+12VDC Outputs

Output Triggers

Out 1-8

V-16 • Video I/O Module

Programmed Video

Out 7/15

Out 8/16

Out 6/14

Input Triggers

Gnd

Out 5/13

5-24V AC¥DC

Out 1/9

Out 4/12

Gnd

Out 2/10

Out 3/11

(-)1(+)2(+)3(+)4(+)

Out 9-16

+12VDC Outputs

Input Triggers

ADA Bus to WH-2000 J1

WH-2000

1 2 3 4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J5

RJ45

WH-2000

1 2 3 4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J5

RJ45

WH-2000

Wire Harness

Trigger

5-24V

AC¥DC 2 (+)3(-)4(+)5(-)

1/2 ASB

115V~

1/4 ASB 230V~

Switch

(10A)

Main

Input

Cat. 5

To Any

Open

Cat. 5

To Any

Open

Network Control I/O

1 Gnd 2 Fdbk 3 Cntrl 4 +V

ADA Bus¤

230V

115 V

115V

WARNING! Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections. AVERTISSEMENT! Energie Electrique

Dangereuse!

Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur.

Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply

Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher

AC

Avant Le Depannage.

115V~/60Hz ¥ 230V~/50Hz

500 WATTS MAX

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

AC

AVP-16 MR Controller

FF

123

BASS

456

789

EXTRA

VOL

*

FM 1 FM 2 AM CD 1 CD 2 DSS DVD AUX

VOL

PTY 1 PTY 2

FF

123

BASS

456

789

EXTRA

VOL

*

FM2FM1 CD1AM DSSCD2 AUXDVD

MC-5011

VOL

OFF

MC-5000

TREB

0

ENT

OFF

MC-3000 OD

OFF

SHIFT

FM2FM1 CD1AM DSSCD2 AUXDVD

MC-5011

VOL

OFF

MC-5000

TREB

0

ENT

OFF

Page 67

IRT-232 IR Transceiver to RS-232 Wireless I/O Device

The secondary two-way data port on the Cinema Reference Mach II is the IR transceiver located in the front panel. Not only does this transceiver receive infrared commands, it also transmits the Cinema Reference’s feed back out in IR form. Using an ADA IR T -232 IR T ransceiver to RS-232 hand-held box, you can run the Cinema Ref II PCOS software on your lap-top PC and communicate to the Cinema Reference Mach II without any hardwired connections, directly through the Cinema Reference’s front panel. When using the IRT-232, the Cinema Reference Mach II must be set to a Baud Rate of 1200 Baud with the front panel IR Active.

ON/OFF

Turn off IRT-232 when not in use.

POWER

RS-232

IRT-232

RS-232 INFRARED TRANSCEIVER

TX

RX

PC Setup & Control Software

The Cinema Ref. II PCOS software is ideal for setup and calibration of the Cinema Reference. While all setup operations in this technical manual are capable of being fully executed using the front panel knobs on the Cinema Reference Mach II, the PC software will most definitely reduce the time spent programming the unit. It permits you to program: the editing of input labels; assigning A/V jacks and default modes to input labels; setting up speaker groups, tone frequency points, tone levels, and setting tone presets; speaker size setup and crossover; channel levels and balance presets, delay levels; bass limiter and bass management settings; all volume related adjustments and all volume preset features. Furthermore, the software permits configurations to be saved internal to the PC for use at a later time. The software permits you to fully control the Cinema Reference Mach II even after your setup is complete. You can communicate to the Cinema Reference Mach II from your PC through a hardwired connection using an ADA ISO-232 (at either 1200 or 19200 Baud) or wireless through the units front panel IR Transceiver using an ADA IRT-232 (1200 Baud Only

- IR Transceiver must be active). For those who desire to capture

IR commands into learning remotes, in particular IR commands that are not available in the IR remote control that ships with the Cinema Reference Mach II, ADA suggests using your PC, the Cinema Ref II PCOS software, and an IRT-

232. Any button press in the PC software is translated to an infrared command which can readily be captured instead.

Cinema Reference MACH II

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

7

5

3

1

8

6

4

2

L

1

R

4

3

2

R

AUDIO INPUTS

Lap-Top PC

U

P

T

N

I

ON/O

FF

Turn off IRT-232

when not in use.

P

OWER

RS-232

IRT-232

RS-232 I

NFRARED TRANSCEIVER

IRT-232

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

VIDEO OUT

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

1

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

OSD

2

L

6

5

R

D

O

E

M

IR Tansmitters

(Transceivers)

T

X

R

X

(Straight-Through)

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

L

78

R

9-Pin D

RS-232 Cable

(Straight-Through)

SELECT SERIES

DVD DISC 1

ALL -24.0 DB

L

O

V

MADE IN U.S.A.

& Receivers

9-Pin D

RS-232 Cable

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

113

2514

POINTS

Y

1

2

L

C

MAIN

R

RS

SUBSBR

U

M

E

2341

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

ISO-232

RS-232

Reverse

(TuneBase)

Normal

Y

3

OUTPUT

P

Y

4

ADA BUS

1 2 3 4

N

A

E

H

L

C

Lap-Top PC

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

B

PR

123

4

VGASWITCHER

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

12VDC OUT

DATA PORT

100mA Max Per

Serial Data

DC 1

ADA Bus¤

1- 2+

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

4 Condutor 18 Gauge ADA Bus Wire

O

R

C

E

D

R

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ADA NET“

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

MADE IN U.S.A.

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement. CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

10A~ Max Switched

CAUTION

DO NOT OPEN

NE PAS OUVRIR

WARNING!

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Side

115 V

Page 68

External IR Receiver Options

ADA manufactures two dif ferent IR receivers that can be connected to the Cinema Reference Mach II. When using an external IR receiver, ADA recommends turning off (Inactive) the Cinema Reference’s front panel IR transceiver.

IRT-3000 IR Transceiver

The IRT-3000 is both an IR receiver and emitter (transceiver) much like the front panel IR transceiver. The IRT-3000 fits a single-gang decora plate and can be remotely located away from the equipment rack. The IRT-3000 should be wired with an ADA Bus cable (3 conductor, 18 gauge, tin-coated copper wire, with an overall braided shield that is a 90% braid - specifically by name, ADA Bus wire). You can connect the IRT-3000 to the Cinema Reference Mach II directly into the preamplifier’s rear panel ADA Bus connector. You can also connect the IRT-3000 to an ADA Bus jack on either the WH-2000 or WH-3000, which is then connected to the Cinema Reference. You can use the IRT-3000 with the IR T-232 and your PC. As such, if the Cinema Reference is located in an equipment closet away from the theater room, you can still communicate two-way wireless, from your PC, providing you aim the IRT-232 (connected to your PC) to the in-wall IRT-3000. ADA also offers a single-gang metal decora box for IRT-3000’s that are intended to sit on a bookshelf or cabinet.

Cinema Reference Mach II

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround

1

2

1

VIDEO INPUTS

3

4

L

2

R

EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

VIDEO OUT

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

1

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

MAIN 2

2

OSD

L

5

R

6

78

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

REC

L

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

6

3

S-VIDEO INPUTS

3

SBL LS

MAIN

RS

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

41

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

1

2

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

123

3

4

P

R

4

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1

DC 2

1- 2+

10A~ Max Switched

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH OME THEATER CONTROLLER

H

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

IRT-3000

IR Transceiver

(Single-Gang Decora)

Page 69

IRR-5000 IR Receiver

The IRR-5000 is a peep-hole size IR receiver that features an RJ-45 jack and is run to the equipment rack via Cat. 5 cable. In order to connect the IRR-5000 to the Cinema Reference Mach II, you will require a WH-2000 Cat-Link Wire Harness. The WH-2000 features both ADA Bus and RJ-45 connectors and is required if you are going to use the IRR-5000. The IRR5000, unlike the IRT-3000, is a receiver only, one-way IR receiver. You can control the Cinema Reference Mach II, but you will not be able to get feedback from the Cinema Reference Mach II out of the IRR-5000.

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

1

2

1

VIDEO INPUTS

3

4

L

2

R

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

5

6

3

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR

VIDEO OUT

3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

1

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

MAIN 2

2

OSD

L

5

R

6

78

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

REC

SBL LS

L

R

41

3

MAIN

RS

Front

Side Back

1.264" .99"

VGASWITCHER

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

1

2

L

C

OPTICAL INPUTS

R

SUBSBR

1

COMPONENT VIDEO

3

Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

3

2

Y

4

OUTPUT

P

B/B-Y PR/R-Y

B

P

123

PR

4

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

L

R

DATA PORT

ADA Bus¤

1 2 3 4

G

AC VOLTAGE

RECORD

OUT

Serial Data

ND

O

UT

I

N

115 V

12

V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET“

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

DC 2 1- 2+

10A~ Max Switched

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RJ-45

Female

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

4 Cond.

18 Gauge

ADA Bus Wire

IRR-5000

1 2 3 4

WH-2000

J1

J2

WH-2000

J3

Wire

J4

Harness

J5

(Cat. 5)

RJ45

RJ-45 Jacks

Cat. 5 Wire

Page 70

BRT-1 Baud Rate Translator

The BRT-1 is used when your Cinema Reference is set to run at 19200 for control system reasons, yet you also wish to control the unit via IR. The BRT-1 will upconvert a 1200 Baud IR signal to 19200 Baud. It does not down-convert a 19200 signal to 1200 and as such, will only permit the Cinema Reference to receive commands. It will not down-convert feedback to IR. The BRT-1 is a passive device that connects to an open ADA Bus port on the ADA Bus wire harness. It does not require any additional settings.

BRT-1

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

1

2

L

1

R

7

4

6

8

L

2

3

R

AUDIO INPUTS

ADA Bus Wire

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ' 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

VGA¥RGB¥HDTV OUTPUT

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

LINE-DOUBLED

VIDEO OUT

1

REC

2

OSD

L

4

5

6

R

18 Gauge

PIN +/-CHAN PIN +/- CHAN

1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B 6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM 0dB

+10dB

S-VIDEO INPUTS

MAIN 2341

REC

SBL LS

L

78

R

4 Cond.

WH-2000

Harness

(Cat. 5)

IRR-5000

MAIN

RS

Wire

VGA¥RGBHV¥HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

COMPONENT VIDEO

B/B-YPR/R-Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

1 2 3 4

WH-2000

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

P

R

123

4

J1

J2

J3

J4

J5

RJ45

RJ-45 Jacks

RJ45

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

12VDC OUT

DATA PORT

100mA Max Per

Serial Data

DC 1

ADA Bus¤

1- 2+

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

DC

Cat. 5 Wire

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

H

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ADA NET“

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L’Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

DC 2 1- 2+

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

BRT-1 Baud Rate Translator

BRT-1

Selector &

Safety Fuse

115V 230V

Use Same

Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Voltage

On This

Side

115 V

Baud Rate Setup

ADA provides two operating speeds (baud rates), either 1200 Baud or 19200 Baud. While 19200 Baud enables faster control and feedback, it will eliminate the ability to control the Cinema Reference Mach II from being controlled via an infrared (unless you add a BRT-1 Baud Rate Translator to the system). At 1200 Baud, a 40KHz IR carrier is capable of being attached to the Cinema Reference’s Hex control strings, hence creating an IR command. This command can be learned into most learning IR remote controls. However, these IR remote controls cannot capture or pass an IR signal with a baud rate of 19200. The BRT-1 can be added to systems that need to operate at 19200 but it is important to note that you can opt to run the Cinema Reference Mach II at 1200 baud without compromising system features.

The Out of the Box default is 1200 Baud. To set the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Baud Rate:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and press the

Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads NETWORK BAUD and

press the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob to select between 1200 MODE or 19.2K MODE. Press the Mode knob to

continue with other setups. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

Page 71

IR Transceiver (Front Panel) Settings

When connecting the Cinema Reference Mach II to an external control system, you may run into a data conflict resulting from sending data into the Cinema Reference while it’s front panel IR transceiver is active. If you are having difficulty establishing communication with the Cinema Reference Mach II serially, ADA suggests turning the Cinema Reference’s front panel IR transceiver off.

The Out of the Box default is set so that the IR Transceiver is active. To alter the Cinema Reference Mach II’s IR Transceiver’s state (On or Off):

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads IR REMOTE and press the

Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob to select between IR REMOTE IS ACTIVE and IR REMOTE IS INAC-

TIVE. Press the Mode knob to continue with other setups. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

Address Setup

The Cinema Reference Mach II can be set to a myriad of addresses in the event multiple Cinema Reference’s are connected to the same network. As such, one can connect a single ISO-232 to the control system and communicate independently to all Cinema Reference Mach II’s. In order to prevent conflicts here, each Cinema Reference Mach II needs to be set to a unique address (there are 256 available addresses). A point of caution is worth noting here. The concept of putting multiple Cinema References on the same network, works best if they are in the same location (i.e. central equipment rack). Second, the units should all be set to run at the optimal baud rate of 19200. Finally , be certain that your control system is capable of handling the amount of feedback from the units in the event they are turned on or updating in short order. A single Cinema Reference Mach II will update approximately 1.5K Bytes of data during boot-up (or update request). Multiply this by the number of units on the network and you have a fair amount of data. and some control system buffers may overload. If you wish to connect your PC to a multiple network, it is worth noting that you can actually select which Cinema Reference you wish to communicate with by selecting the corresponding address in the PC software provided. Because ADA recommends that you run the Cinema Reference Mach II’s at 19200 Baud, you cannot expect to use the IRT-232 to communicate with your PC via IR.

The Out of the Box default address is set to 0. The IR remote controls included with the Cinema Reference only work if the unit is set to address 0. Altering the address will cause this remote control to no longer function. To alter the Cinema Reference Mach II’s Address:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and press the

Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads NETWORK BUS and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob to select an alternate address. Press the Mode knob to continue with

other setups. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

Page 72

1

2

1

2

1

Cinema Reference Mach II (Address 0)

VGA•RGB•HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

4

6

L

2

3

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

5

Cinema Reference Mach II (Address 1)

VGA•RGB•HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

4

6

L

2

3

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

5

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. © 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

MAIN 2

OSD

L

6

R

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. © 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL 2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

0dB

MAIN 2

OSD

L

6

R

VGASWITCHER

VGA•RGBHV•HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

41

3

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

VGA•RGBHV•HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

POINTS

Y

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

1

2

L

C

R

SUBSBR

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

OPTICAL INPUTS

123

MAIN

RS

41

3

MAIN

RS

3

Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

COMPONENT VIDEO

3

Y

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

Y

4

Y

4

O

UTPUT

O

UTPUT

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

B

123

P

B/B-YPR/R-Y

B

P

123

P

R

4

P

R

4

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus®

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

VGASWITCHER

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus®

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET™

DC 2 1- 2+

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET™

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

H

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L'Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

H

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L'Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector &

Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

II

Voltage

Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

To Control

System

1

2

1

Cinema Reference Mach II (Address 2)

VGA•RGB•HDTV OUTPUT

PROCESSED VGA ONLY

VIDEO INPUTS

3

5

4

6

L

2

3

R

7

8

L

4

R

AUDIO INPUTS

COMPOSITE & S-VIDEO ARE UP-CONVERTED &

VIDEO OUT

1

2

5

ISO-232

ADA BUS

RS-232

Normal

Reverse

(TuneBase)

ISO-232

"Dolby", "Pro Logic", & the double-D Symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942, 5,956,764, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. "DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround", and "Neo 6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. © 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and is a trademark of Dolby. Used under authorization.

LINE-DOUBLED

PIN +/- CHAN PIN +/- CHAN 1 / 14 LT 7 / 20 SBL

8 CHANNEL DB-25 INPUT

2 / 15 CT 8 / 21 SBR 3 / 16 RT 9 /10/22 SHLD 4 / 17 SB 11 / 23 R.T.A 5 / 18 SL 12 / 24 R.T.B

REC

6 / 19 SR 13 / 25 R.T.C

MULTI-PIN LFE SUM

0dB

+10dB

REC

L

78

R

S-VIDEO INPUTS

SBL LS

OSD

L

6

R

MAIN 2

1 2 3 4

VGASWITCHER

VGA•RGBHV•HDTV INPUTS

2341

113

2514

COMPONENT VIDEO

POINTS

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

1

41

3

2

L

C

MAIN

RS

OPTICAL INPUTS

R

SUBSBR

123

DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUTS

Y

B/B-YPR/R-Y

P

3

O

UTPUT

B

P

Y

P

R

123

4

AC VOLTAGE

115 V

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

RECORD

OUT

L

R

DATA PORT

Serial Data

ADA Bus®

1 2 3 4

G

ND

O

UT

I

N

12

V

12VDC OUT

100mA Max Per

DC 1 1- 2+

DC

115V~2/10 A.S.B. 230V~1/10 A.S.B.

ADA NET™

DC 2 1- 2+

C

INEMA REFERENCE MACH

OME THEATER CONTROLLER

H

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION!

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE.

NE PAS OUVRIR

MADE IN U.S.A.

WARNING!

Risk Of Hazardous Energy! Make Proper Connections.

AVERTISSEMENT!

Energie Electrique Dangereuse! Faire Des Connexions Propres

Pour L'Hautparleur. Voir La Notice De Fonctionnement.

CAUTION: Disconnect Supply Cord Before Servicing.

ATTENTION: Debrancher Avant Le Depannage.

AC OUTPUT

AC INPUT

10A~ Max Switched

115V~60Hz/230V~50Hz

II

Voltage

Selector & Safety Fuse

On This

Side

115 V

115V 230V

Use Same Value Fuse 115V~1AS.B. 230V~.5AS.B.

1 2 3 4

LOOP THRU

J1

J2

J3

J4

J5

WH-3000

J6

Wire

J7

Harness

J8

J9

J10

1 2 3 4

WH-3000

Page 73

Output Channel Indicator Lamps

The Cinema Reference Mach II is extremely flexible when it comes to decoding today’s advanced multi-channel digitally encoded signals. While the process of selecting decoding modes on its surface may appear confusing, there are several aspects of decoding that the Cinema Reference Mach II does automatically. To even further simplify the mode selection process, ADA has also included several default options that will make it easy to operate.

The Cinema Reference Mach II features Channel and Mode indication lamps which will make it easy to understand the type of input signal, how it was encoded, how many channels are present, and to how many channels are playing in the system. Prior to proceeding with a discussion on the mode and input channel lamps, it is important that you already determined the number of the speakers in your system. This is discussed under Speaker Setup 1. Please note, that the output lamps will only illuminate active speaker channels based on this setup. Furthermore, all active channels will only have their lamps on if a mode is selected that is designed to play to all speakers. For a 7.1 speaker setup, the back surround lamps will only illuminate if an EX/ES Mode is selected while playing multichannel material or Quad/Hex (or Neo-6) for two-channel material. If you have all speakers engaged by you selected a Stereo Mode, only the right, left, and subwoofer Output lamps would be on.

7.1 Channel Speaker Array

Here, the system will include three speakers in the front of the room (left, center, and right channels), two surround speakers (typically dipole in nature, placed to the left and right side of the seating area), two back surround speaker (left and right against the back of the theater), and a subwoofer(s). The subwoofer represents the “.1” and the other channels represent the “7”. Here the Output channel indicator will display all channels, providing the correct mode is selected.

6.1 Channel Speaker Array

In a 6.1 speaker array , only one back surround speaker exists, typically centered along the back wall of the theater. In this case, the Output channel indicator will only display the SBL leaving the SBR lamp off, providing the correct mode is selected. This indicates that the system has been setup for only one Surround Back channel.

5.1 Channel Speaker Array

This speaker array was the most common configuration prior to the introduction of THX EX. Here, the system will consist of three speakers across the front of the room (left, center, right), two surround speakers, and a subwoofer(s).

4.1 Channel Speaker Array

In a 4.1 speaker array , the system is void of a center channel speaker. If the room environment cannot support the placement of a center channel speaker, the center channel will be turned of f so its information can be redirected to the front left and right speakers. While this is not the most ideal situation, turning off the center channel will ensure that no signal is lost. Here the Output channel indicators will show the absence of the center channel while indicating the presence of the front left and right, as well as surround left and right and subwoofer. As a point of information, when running surround back speakers, either one or two, these channels will indicate as described above, providing the correct mode is selected.

Page 74

Mode Selection

The Cinema Reference Mach II is first and foremost an auto-detecting processor. As such, when it receives an input signal, it will automatically determine its makeup and in turn, engage the appropriate decoding mode. There are three primary types of signals that the Cinema Reference is capable of decoding, a Dolby Digital encoded signal, a DTS encoded signal, and a stereo or mono audio signal (PCM digital audio {Pulse Code Modulation} or analog audio).

For discussion in this manual, Dolby Digital and DTS are referred to as Cinema Modes (although they are also used for music playback). Cinema decoding modes differ significantly from 2 Channel modes, where there are 27 options when playing a stereo signal, there are only 9 Cinema mode options when playing Dolby Digital or DTS encoded material. While this seems unusual, the fact is that most of the critical settings are automatic when playing a Dolby Digital or DTS source, because the complex bit stream contains significant information that permits the Cinema Reference Mach II to play the material to perfection. To better understand the Cinema Modes, both Dolby Digital and DTS bit streams will be examined more closely .

When wishing to select a mode

1 Turn the Mode knob until the desired mode is on the display’s

second line and press the mode knob.

When a stereo or mono source is being played, the following 2 Channel modes are active:

Stereo, Mono, DTS Neo 6, DTS Neo 6 THX, Pro Logic II - Pro Logic, Pro Logic II - Pro Logic THX, Pro Logic II Movie, Pro Logic II Movie THX, Pro Logic II Matrix, Pro Logic II Virtual, Pro Logic II Music, Pro Logic II Custom 1, Pro Logic II Custom 1 THX, Pro Logic II Custom 2, Pro Logic II Custom 2 THX, Pro Logic II Custom 3, Pro Logic II Custom 3 THX, Quad/Hex Bypass, Stereo Enhance, Mono Enhance, Stereo 5, Mono 5, Stadium, Theater, Hall, Club, Church.

l

e

S

c

O

t

M

o

d

e

D

E

o

T

n

r

u

T

M

1. Dial In New Mode

Turn the Mode Selector knob until the second line of the LCD display reads the mode you wish to select. As you turn the knob, you will notice that the top line of the display indicates the current source in play and the second line indicates the modes available. The Cinema Reference will not engage the new mode until Step 2 is accessed.

2. Engage New Mode

Once the second line of the display indicates the next mode you wish to access, press the Mode Selector knob to engage this mode.

Please note, that Dolby Digital or DTS audio tracks may only contain a two-channel mix. For some of these tracks, certain rules apply that may limit mode selections. T wo channel digital sources may have an encoded flags that will specifically request specific decoding. Some Dolby Digital two channel mixes may specify some type of Pro Logic decoding with the presence of a Pro Logic flag. Some DTS two channel mixes may specify DTS Neo 6 using a similar flag. When listening to a multi-channel encoded source, either Dolby Digital or DTS, the following Cinema modes are available:

Stereo Downmix, Mono Downmix, Discrete & Direct, Discrete, Discrete & THX, Discrete and EX/ES, THX & EX/ES, THX Ultra 2 Cinema, THX Music Mode.

Depending on the type of signal the Cinema Reference Mach II is receiving, only the modes that can be engaged will be available for selection.

Page 75

Multi-Channel Formats

Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Surround EX

A Dolby Digital bit stream most typically contains a 5.1 channel mix or upon closer inspection, a 3.2.1.0 mix. To examine this further, the 3 refers to the front three channels (left, center, right), the 2 refers to the surround channels (left and right), and the 1 or “.1” refers to the subwoofer (also often called LFE - Low Frequency Effects). While there are other options for mixing Dolby Digital (older movies that were never mixed in multi-channel but play off a DVD are often encoded in Dolby Digital, as 2.0.0.0 or stereo), most material is available in a 5.1 format.

Dolby Digital Surround EX is best described as an enhancement to Dolby Digital. Here a mono signal is embedded into the discrete surround left and right channels. This signal creates an image in the back of the room, between the surround left and right channels. If a film has been encoded in Dolby Digital Surround EX, the digital bit stream will contain a “flag” which tells the Cinema Reference Mach II that it has been specifically mixed and mastered to take into consideration a playback system that has one or two surround back speakers. While a standard 5.1 mix can be engaged to play through a 7.1 or 6.1 speaker system, Dolby Digital Surround EX material is specifically mastered for these systems. In the event that you have only a 5.1 speaker array in your system and you are playing a Surround EX DVD, the Cinema Reference Mach II will redirect this information to the surround speakers in place. Please note, that even a Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is still only considered to be a 5.1 channel mix (or 3.2.1.0) because the surround back channel is not discrete.

DTS, DTS ES Matrix, and DTS ES Discrete

DTS, much like Dolby Digital is most frequently mixed in a 5.1 format or 3.2.1.0. Also, similar to Dolby Digital Surround EX, material encoded with a DTS ES Matrix will contain a flag in the digital bit stream that indicates that this material was specifically mixed with a mono surround back image contained in the left and right surround channels. While this mix is intended to play through a 7.1 or 6.1 speaker array, it is still only a 5.1 (or 3.2.1.0) mix in that there are only six discrete encoded channels.

DTS ES Discrete is a more involved encoding format in that it is a true 7.1 or eight channel mix. Here there are two additional channels in the bit stream and the source material is a true 3.2.1.2 mix, where the last 2 refers to the additional two channels for surround back left and right. In the event you are playing a source encoded with DTS ES Discrete through a system that is setup with either a

5.1 or 6.1 speaker array , the Cinema Reference Mach II will redirect the information to either the single surround back speaker or in if it is not present, the two surround back speakers.

Page 76

Cinema Modes & Indicator Lamps

Some multi-channel material you play on your home theater system offer only one type of audio track. From a HDTV or DSS broadcast, this will be Dolby Digital. When playing a DVD, you may have several audio track options also known a Language Selections. Most DVD discs indicate the available audio tracks on the back of the disc jacket/box. In order for the Cinema Reference Mach II to decode the audio track you desire, you may need to select this track (Language) prior to playing of the movie. This is typically done in the DVD’s menu.

The following describes what the Cinema modes do to the encoded material specified. While output lamp indicators depend on the number of speakers in your system, the discussion here presumes a full

7.1 home theater speaker array.

Dolby Digital 5.1 Surround

Source material encoded in Dolby Digital 5.1 Surround will cause the DOLBY symbol to illuminate along with the DIGITAL symbol. Also, the L, C, R, LFE, LS, RS Input channel indicators will also be lit. The following Output lamps will illuminate depending on the Mode selected.

Dolby Digital 5.1 Stereo Downmix

STEREO DNMX - Stereo Downmix takes the center channel and

surround information and sends it to the front left and right speakers. The bass information is sent to subwoofer . - L, R, & SUB Output lamps & channels are on.

MONO DNMX - Mono Downmix sends every channel to just the

center speaker. The bass information is sent to subwoofer . C & SUB Output channel lamps are on.

DIRECT - Sets all speakers to the Large setting and cancels all

other filters. This mode is mandated by DTS, not Dolby or THX. ADA does not recommend this mode if your speaker system is not be able to play full range audio through the front and surround speakers. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on.

DISCRETE - This is ADA’s primary Cinema mode as it does not alter

your Speaker Setup and bass filter setups. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on.

Dolby Digital 5.1 Mono Downmix

Dolby Digital 5.1 Direct

Dolby Digital 5.1 Discrete

DISCRETE +THX - This mode applies THX enhancements to the

Discrete mode and is ideal for film playback. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on. The THX lamp is also on and THX enhancements are engaged.

Dolby Digital 5.1 Discrete + THX

Page 77

Dolby Digital 5.1 Discrete + EX/ES

DISCRETE +EX/ES - This mode will engage the two back surround

speakers which will then receive mono information contained in the left and right surround channels. This mode is ideal when viewing a movie that is Dolby Digital 5.1 encoded (without EX), where still want the additional back surround speakers to be active. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on. The EX lamp is also on as are the SBL and SBR channel lamps.

Dolby Digital 5.1 THX + EX/ES

Dolby Digital 5.1 THX Ultra 2

Dolby Digital 5.1 THX Music

THX +EX/ES - This mode applies THX enhancements to the Dis-

crete +EX/ES mode. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on. The EX lamp is also on as are the SBL and SBR channel lamps. The THX lamp is also on and THX enhancements are engaged.

THX ULTRA 2 - This mode is to be used for film playback and also

has all channels active, much like EX/ES. It also applies THX Ultra 2 enhancements including those that are set in THX Ultra Setup 5. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on. The EX lamp is also on as are the SBL and SBR channel lamps. The THX lamp is also on and THX Ultra 2 enhancements are engaged.

THX MUSIC - This mode is to be used for music playback and also

has all channels active, much like EX/ES. It also applies THX Ultra 2 enhancements including those that are set in THX Ultra Setup 5. - L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS Output channel lamps are on. The EX lamp is also on as are the SBL and SBR channel lamps. The THX lamp is also on and THX Ultra 2 Music enhancements are engaged.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Page 78

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Source material encoded in Dolby Digital Surround EX will cause the DOLBY and EX symbols to illuminate along with the DIGITAL symbol. While you can force the EX symbol to appear with standard Dolby Digital 5.1 material by selecting an EX/ES mode, a DVD track that is specifically encoded with EX, will cause the EX lamp to engage when on the more basic DISCRETE mode. This indication confirms that this audio track is a true (flagged) EX mix. Also, the L, C, R, LFE, LS, RS Input channel indicators will also be lit. The Output lamps will illuminate depending on the Mode selected as described in the previous section under Dolby Digital 5.1.

DTS 5.1 Surround

DTS 5.1 Surround Direct or Discrete

DTS 5.1 Surround Discrete +EX/ES

Source material encoded in DTS 5.1 Surround operate in a manner similar to Dolby Digital 5.1 Surround material. When playing software encoded in DTS 5.1 Surround, the DTS lamp will illuminate along with the L, C, R, LFE, LS, and RS Input lamps. Selecting a more basic Discrete mode will engage the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output lamps.

Again, like Dolby Digital 5.1 material, selecting an EX/ES mode will send audio to the back surround speakers activating the ES lamp as well as L, C, R, LFE, LS, RS, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps. This feature performs similar to the EX feature for Dolby Digital 5.1 tracks.Also, like Dolby Digital 5.1 material, selecting a THX or THX Ultra 2 mode will engage the appropriate THX enhancements and activate the THX indicator lamp.

DTS ES Matrix

Much like Dolby Digital Surround EX, DTS ES Matrix encoded material contains the ES flag in the digital bit stream, indicating that this track was specifically mixed on a system with back surround speakers. When on a more basic Discrete mode, playing a disc track that contains an ES flag, will cause the DTS and ES symbols to illuminate along with the Digital symbol. The number of Output channels is not effected by the ES flag unless and EX/ES or THX Ultra 2 mode is selected. Then the BSL and BSR Output channel lamps will engage with audio from the back surround speakers. Again, like DTS 5.1 Surround, Dolby Digital 5.1 Surround, or Dolby Digital Surround EX, all Cinema Mode features, as previously described, are available.

DTS ES Discrete

A disc containing a DTS ES Discrete audio track is unlike the other

5.1 or 5.1 with EX/ES encoding formats. DTS ES Discrete material has a sixth discrete channel in addition to LFE. Hence it is a true 6.1 format. Furthermore, the decoding process electronically manipulates this channel such that it acts more like a full seven channel system in addition to LFE (7.1). At the time of this printing, DTS ES Discrete material is the only software that provides a true eight channel input.

DTS Matrix ES Discrete

DTS Matrix ES Discrete +EX/ES

When playing a DTS ES Discrete audio track, the Cinema Reference Mach II will detect the ES Discrete flag in the digital bit stream. If you are on even the more basic Discrete mode, the Cinema Reference Mach II indicate all channels; L, C, R, LFE, SL, SR, SBL, and SBR on the Input channel lamps. This is the only time that the SBL and SBR Input channel lamps will engage. Furthermore, because of the presence of the DTS ES Discrete flag, the ES indicator will also engage in addition to the L, C, R, SUB, SL, SR, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps. Note, that with DTS ES Discrete material, you do not need to select an EX/ES or THX Ultra 2 mode in order to engage the back surround channels. For this decoding format, all Cinema modes, as previously described apply.

DTS ES Discrete

Page 79

Two Channel Modes & Indicator Lamps

Dolby Surround 2.0

While many discs offer an alternate stereo Dolby Digital track, often older films on DVD only feature this track, as these movies were never mastered in more than two channels. The Cinema Reference Mach II indicates this type of audio track by illuminating only the L & R Input channel lamps along with the Dolby Digital lamp. If you see this combination when playing a DVD of a more current film, one which most likely features the more advanced 5.1 mix, chances are that you may have selected the wrong audio track (Language) in the DVD’s title menu. Prior to proceeding with the film, confirm the proper audio track selection. Please note, that the 2.0 indication may occur as the movie loads, prior to the opening scene, even if you have made certain that the 5.1 track has been selected.

Because Dolby Surround 2.0 is only a two-channel mix, the Cinema Modes are no longer available. Here, you now have the ability to select from the 27 Two-Channel Mode options.

Dolby Surround 2.0 Pro Logic Movie

PCM Digital Audio

PCM digital audio (Pulse Code Modulation) is the stereo audio that is digitally encoded onto CDs and laser discs, as well as the audio output of some broadcast receivers. For standard PCM digital audio, no prior decoding takes place to derive the stereo signal (as in Dolby Surround 2.0). Again, the Cinema Reference features 27 decoding modes for PCM digital audio.

Analog Audio (Stereo or Mono)

Just like PCM digital audio, the same 27 Two-Channel modes available for PCM digital audio (and Dolby Surround 2.0) are available here as well.

When the Cinema Reference does detects a Dolby or DTS two-channel mix as well as when the unit simply detects no encoding at all (complete absence of a Dolby or DTS bit stream), the Cinema modes are defeated and the two channels modes are engaged. The Input Channel lamp will illuminate just the L & R channel lamps. If you are on an analog input, the Digital symbol will turn off. Here, the following modes are available and the output lamps correspond to the mode selected.

STEREO - This two channel mode will active only the left and right speakers along with the subwoofer.

The L, R, and SUB Output channel lamps will also illuminate.

PCM Digital Audio Pro Logic Movie

Analog Audio Pro Logic Movie

MONO - In this mode, only the center channel and the subwoofer are active. If a stereo signal is in

play , both right and left channels mix to mono and play through the center speaker . The C and SUB Output channel lamps are on.

DTS NEO 6 - DTS Neo 6 is one of the few Two Channel modes that will permit you to engage your

entire speaker array (7.1) when playing a two channel source. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps are on and all speakers are active.

DTS NEO6+THX - This mode is the same as DTS Neo 6 and includes the addition of THX enhance-

ments. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps are on, all speakers are active, and the THX symbol is illuminated.

Page 80

PROLOGIC - Pro Logic decoding is a matrix decoding mode for two-channel sound-tracks and works

best with material that was specifically encoded in Dolby Surround. Here the surround channels have a mono, not stereo type of sound field. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

PROLOGIC THX - This mode is the same as Pro Logic and includes the addition of THX enhance-

ments. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on, all speakers are active, and the THX symbol is illuminated.

PLII MOVIE - Pro Logic II Movie decoding is an advanced matrix decoding mode for two-channel film

sound-tracks and is optimized for programs or movies that are encoded in Dolby Surround. Here the surround speakers have greater spatial separation, providing a more stereo like sound field. This mode is also appropriate for video games. This mode retains the important features of Pro Logic, but with full-bandwidth stereo surround output, the listening experience is much closer to the sound you get from Dolby Digital. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

PLII MVE + THX - This mode is the same as Pro Logic II Movie and includes the addition of THX

enhancements. This is also an excellent mode for film playback when THX enhancements are preferred. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on, all speakers are active, and the THX symbol is illuminated.

PLII MATRIX - Pro Logic II Matrix produces surround sound from mono material. Here, the L, C, R,

SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

PLII VIRTUAL - Pro Logic II Virtual is the same as the Movie mode but here, no delay is applied to the

surround channels. - Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

PLII MUSIC - Pro Logic II Music creates a rich and enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources

such as CDs. In Pro Logic II Music mode, three controls permit you to fine-tune the soundfield.

CENTER WIDTH control allows you to gradually spread the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers. At its widest setting, all the sound from the center is mixed into the left and right. This control may help achieve a more spacious sound or a better blend of the front image.

PANORAMA wraps the sound of the front left and right speakers around you for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION control which adjusts the front/back balance to suit your taste. To adjust Center Width, Panorama, or Dimension Control:

1 Select an Input label that is playing music and press the Input knob. (You will want to be

listening to a source component as you make the following changes).

2 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads PLII MUSIC and press the Mode

knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

Page 81

4 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads PLII OPTIONS and press

the Mode knob.

5 The second line of the display will now read PANORAMA. To alter the Panorama settings,

press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step 7. To completely exit the setup

menu, turn the Volume knob. 6 Turn the Mode knob to either turn Panorama ON or OFF. Then press the Mode knob. 7 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads CENTER WIDTH. To

alter the Center Width settings, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step

9. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

8 Turn the Mode knob to alter the Center Width setting from 0 to 7, in increments of 1. When you

are done, press the Mode knob. 9 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads DIMENSION. To alter the

Dimension settings, press the Mode knob. To return to the previous setup menu option,

turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and

press the Mode knob. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 10 Turn the Mode knob to alter the Dimension settings from 0 to 7 in increments of 1. Then press

the Mode knob. To return to the previous setup menu option, turn the Mode knob clockwise

until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Mode knob. To com-

pletely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

PLII CUSTOM1, PLII CUSTOM2, PLII CUSTOM3 - The Cinema Reference Mach II features three Pro

Logic II modes that are completely custom in nature, permitting you complete control over all Pro Logic II features. For each of these three modes, you can create different settings so that as you switch between these modes, the sound field alters. These modes are ideal for music playback but can also be used for custom sound fields when watching sporting events. The features that can be altered here include:

CENTER WIDTH control allows you to gradually spread the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers. At its widest setting, all the sound from the center is mixed into the left and right. This control may help achieve a more spacious sound or a better blend of the front image.

PANORAMA wraps the sound of the front left and right speakers around you for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION control which adjusts the front/back balance to suit your taste. AUTO BALANCE - When the auto balance is on, the Cinema Reference Mach II compensates

for the discrepancies in the left and right channels. SURROUND DELAY - When surround delay is on, the delays for the surround channels are

activated.

Page 82

SURROUND FILTERS - There are three surround filters which in the Cinema Reference’s menu are marked 0,1, & 2. 0 refers to all filters off, where the surround channels receive full range audio. 1 refers to the low pass filter being active and set to 7KHz (as in the Pro Logic mode). 2 refers to the high pass filter and shelf filter being active. You can select one of the three options under this setting.

RS INVERTED - When this setting is on, the polarity of the right surround sound speaker is inverted.

COEF MATRIX - There are three surround filters which in the Cinema Reference’s menu are marked 0,1, & 2. 0 refers to a setting most in line with traditional Pro Logic decoding with a more mono surround image. 1 is used in creating virtual, music, movie, and matrix modes where a more stereo like image is applied to the surround channels. 2 is used with modes where the panorama option is enabled, thereby providing the wrap-around effect.

ADA suggests altering these settings while you are listening to a two channel source (CD). To adjust these settings:

1 Select an Input label that is playing music and press the Input knob. (You will want to be

listening to a source component as you make the following changes).

2 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads PLII CUSTOM1 (2 or 3) and press the

Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads PLII OPTIONS and press

the Mode knob.

5 The second line of the display will now read PANORAMA. To alter the Panorama settings,

press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step 7. To completely exit the setup

menu, turn the Volume knob. 6 Turn the Mode knob to either turn Panorama ON or OFF. Then press the Mode knob. 7 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads CENTER WIDTH. To

alter the Center Width settings, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step

9. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

8 Turn the Mode knob to alter the Center Width setting from 0 to 7, in increments of 1. When you

are done, press the Mode knob. 9 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads DIMENSION. To alter the

Dimension settings, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step 11. To

completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 10 Turn the Mode knob to alter the Dimension setting from 0 to 7, in increments of 1. When you

are done, press the Mode knob.

Page 83

11 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads AUTO BALANCE. To

alter the Auto Balance setting, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step

13. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 12 Turn the Mode knob to set the Auto Balance ON or OFF, then press the Mode knob. 13 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads SURR DELAY. To alter

the Surround Delay setting, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step 15.

To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 14 Turn the Mode knob to set the Surround Delay ON or OFF, then press the Mode knob. 15 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads SURR FILTER. To alter

the Surround Filter setting, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting skip to Step 17.

To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 16 Turn the Mode knob to select the Surround Filter setting you desire (0, 1, or 2), then press the

Mode knob. 17 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads RS INVERTED. To alter

the polarity of the Right Surround speaker, press the Mode knob. To alter another setting

skip to Step 19. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob. 18 Turn the Mode knob to set the RS INVERTED ON or OFF, then press the Mode knob. 19 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line reads COEF MATRIX. T o alter

the Matrix Coefficient setting, press the Mode knob. To completely exit the setup menu, turn

the Volume knob. 20 Turn the Mode knob to select the Matrix Coefficient setting you desire (0, 1, or 2), then press

the Mode knob. To return to the previous setup menu option, turn the Mode knob clockwise

until the display’s second line reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Mode knob. To com-

pletely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

You can repeat these steps for the two additional PLII CUSTOM modes.

PLII CM1+THX, PLII CM2+THX, PLII CM3+THX - These modes apply THX enhancements to the

three custom Pro Logic II modes you created. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on and all speakers are active.

Page 84

Proprietary Two Channel ADA Modes

QUAD BYPASS - Quad Bypass is a proprietary ADA Mode that will permit you to engage your entire

speaker array (7.1) when playing a two channel source. Quad Bypass is ideal for music playback and utilizes the entire sound field. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps are on and all speakers are active.

STEREO ENH - Stereo Enhance is a proprietary ADA Mode that is applied to two channel signal and

is useful for playback of source material with relatively weak stereo separation. There are two adjustments that can be made to the Stereo Enhance mode, Effect Delay and Effect Level. When Stereo Enhance is engaged, the Effect Delay setting (0-20 ms range) is applied to the left channel, leaving the right channel untouched, all prior to Pro Logic decoding. The Effect Level can best be described as the throttle for the decoding circuit. The Effect Level has a range from -20dB to +20dB. At +20dB, the Stereo Enhance mode has its effect set to maximum where at -20dB, the effect is least present. You can sample changes to the Effect Delay and the Effect level as they are being made. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

To alter the Effect Delay and Level for Stereo Enhance:

1 Select an Input label that is playing a two channel signal and press the Input knob. (You will

want to be listening to a source component as you make the following changes).

2 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads STEREO ENH and press the Mode

knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

4 Turn the Mode knob so that the display’s second line reads STEREO ENHNC and press the

Mode knob.

5 The second line of the display will now read LEVEL. To alter the Effect Level settings, press

the Mode knob. To alter the Effect Delay setting skip to Step 7. To completely exit the setup menu, turn the Volume knob.

6 Turn the Mode knob to set the Effect Level between -20dB to +20dB. Then press the Mode

knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line now reads DELAY and press

the Mode knob.

8 Turn the Mode knob to set the Effect Delay between 0ms and 20ms. Then press the Mode

knob.

9 To continue with other setup menu options, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s

second line reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Mode knob. To completely exit the setup menu, turn any knob other than the Mode knob.

Page 85

MONO ENH - Mono Enhance is a proprietary ADA Mode that is applied to a mono signal and is useful

for playback of source material with no stereo separation. There are two adjustments that can be made to the Mono Enhance mode, Effect Delay and Effect Level. In this mode, the two channels are first mixed mono together, then the mono enhancement feature is applied, with the delay set to the left channel (after mixing down to mono) and prior to the Pro Logic decoding. This permits the Mono Enhance mode to deliver surround sound with depth and feel, even though the input signal is mono and during standard Dolby Pro Logic playback, would only provide audio out of the center channel. The Effect Level can best be described as the throttle for the decoding circuit. The Effect Level has a range from -20dB to +20dB. At +20dB, the Mono Enhance mode has its effect set to maximum where at -20dB, the effect is least present. You can sample changes to the Effect Delay and the Effect level as they are being made. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

To alter the Effect Delay and Level for Mono Enhance:

1 Select an Input label that is playing a mono signal and press the Input knob. (You will want to

be listening to a source component as you make the following changes). 2 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads MONO ENH and press the Mode

knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob. 4 Turn the Mode knob so that the display’s second line reads MONO ENHANCE and press the

Mode knob. 5 The second line of the display will now read LEVEL. To alter the Effect Level settings, press

the Mode knob. To alter the Effect Delay setting skip to Step 7. To completely exit the setup

menu, turn the Volume knob. 6 Turn the Mode knob to set the Effect Level between -20dB to +20dB. Then press the Mode

knob. 7 Turn the Mode knob one click so that the display’s second line now reads DELAY and press

the Mode knob. 8 Turn the Mode knob to set the Effect Delay between 0ms and 20ms.Then press the Mode

knob. 9 To continue with other setup menu options, turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s

second line reads BACK TO MAIN and press the Mode knob. T o completely exit the setup

menu, turn any knob other than the Mode knob.

Page 86

Fun Modes

The Cinema Reference Mach II also features seven Fun Modes that may prove interesting to you.

Stereo 5, Mono 5, Stadium, Theater, Hall, Club, & Church

STEREO 5 - Stereo 5 is only capable of being engaged when playing two-channel source material.

This mode applies the stereo image across the entire sound field and will also play out of the back surround speakers. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps are on.

MONO 5 - Mono 5 is only capable of being engaged when playing two-channel source material. This

mode applies a mono image across the entire sound field and will also play out of the back surround speakers. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, RS, SBL, and SBR Output channel lamps are on.

The other five Fun Modes are room type modes; Stadium , Theater, Hall, Club, and Church. Unlike either Cinema Modes which are specific to only multi-channel digital source material or T wo Channel Modes which are specific to only stereo or mono source material, these five Fun Modes can be applied to all types of material playing through the Cinema Reference Mach II (with the exception of DVD Audio or SACD).

STADIUM - This mode is supposed to sound like a stadium and is useful for playback of a concert or

sporting event. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

THEATER - This mode is supposed to sound like a theater and is useful for playback of plays or

operas. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

HALL - This mode is supposed to sound like a hall and is useful for playback of chamber music. Here,

the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

CLUB - This mode is supposed to sound like a dance club and is useful for playback of music videos

and other dance music. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

CHURCH - This mode is supposed to sound like a church and is useful for playback of choral music.

Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

When playing a non-multi-channel source, to select one of these modes:

1 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads the desired mode and press the

Mode knob.

When playing a multi-channel source (i.e. DVD), these modes can also be applied. Please note, that when selecting any of these modes, the multi-channel signal is first down-mixed to two-channel prior to the mode effects being applied. This implies, that a 5.1 source is first mixed to 2.0 and then delivered in 5.1 output. While the output is 5.1, the discrete input channels are no longer discrete on the output. Here, the L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS Output channel lamps are on.

Page 87

Dolby Digital 5.1 Stereo Downmix

On Cinema Reference Mach II preamplifiers with a Release Version of 3.46 or less, these five modes are not accessible directly when playing a multi-channel source. To determine the Release Number, turn the Cinema Reference Mach II completely off and then turn it on again. The Release Number will briefly appear on the front panel display. To access these modes, you need to:

1 Pause your player such that 5.1 material is no longer de-

tected by the Cinema Reference Mach II.

2 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads one

of these room type modes (Stadium , Theater , Hall, Club,

or Church) and press the Mode knob. 3 Press play on your DVD player, reactivating the 5.1 signal. 4 Turn the Mode knob until the display’s second line reads

STEREO DNMX and press the Mode knob.

At this time, the selected room type mode will engage. Please note, that when selecting STEREO DNMX, where the two-channel mode for this input label is something other than Stadium , Theater, Hall, Club, or Church, the Output channel lamps typically indicate only L, R, and SUB channel lamps.

Dolby Digital 5.1

Stereo Downmix with Room Type Mode

(Stadium, Theater, Hall, Club, or Church)

When the input labels two-channel mode is set to one of these room type modes, the Output channel lamps now indicate L, C, R, SUB, LS, and RS when the STEREO DNMX mode is activated on a 5.1 source. This indicates that a room type mode is engaged.

On Cinema Reference Mach II preamplifiers with a Release Number greater than 3.46, these five modes can be directly accessed while actively playing a 5.1 source. To determine the Release Number, turn the Cinema Reference Mach II completely of f and then turn it on again. The Release Number will briefly appear on the front panel display. To engage the room-type modes:

1 Turn the Mode knob until the display reads the desired room

type mode (STADIUM DNMX, THEATER DNMX, HALL

DNMX, CLUB DNMX, or CHURCH DNMX) and then press

the Mode knob.

Page 88

THX Enhancements

For either Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS, or DTS ES, THX enhancements can be turned on or off. If THX is present, the THX mode lamp will be lit.

When playing a two channel source signal, the IN indicator will display the L and R for Left and Right. The only mode lamp that might be illuminated is THX, identifying the engagement of THX enhancements.

Please note, the Cinema Reference Mach II does not detect the presence of THX as it is not an encoded process but rather an enhancement process. Use THX mode for any cinematic sources. THX certification to video tapes, laser discs, and DVDs is intended to ensure that the material was properly mixed and transferred and does not directly relate to the THX certification of the Cinema Reference. To engage either full-blown THX or THX Re-EQ, you must do so manually on the Cinema Reference.

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established to make your experience of the film soundtrack as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions. The soundtrack created for the movie theater is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. When the THX mode is on, the following three THX technologies are automatically added after the decoded signal:

Re-Equalization™ - The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because the film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment.

Timbre Matching™ - The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theater , there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front and surround speakers.

Page 89

Adaptive Decorrelation™ - In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers help create an

enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theater there are usually, only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes on surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates-

-with only two speakers--the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater. When you select a mode that includes THX Enhancements, all three enhancements are active (On).

When you select a non-THX mode, these filters are off. While the THX modes permit instant access to certain THX enhancements, the Cinema Reference

Mach II also permits you to selectively turn the Re-EQ, Timbre Match, and Decorrelation enhancements to on or off. If you are interested in adjusting the effects of Re-EQ, Timbre Match, and Decorrelation, you can do so following the steps below.

1 While playing a source, select a non-THX mode. 2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 The display’s second line will now read RE-EQUALIZE. T o turn THX Re-Equalization on or off,

press the Mode knob. To adjust other THX filters, skip to step 4.

4 While the display’s top line reads RE-EQUALIZE, you can activate (IS ACTIVE) or deactivate

(IS INACTIVE) the Re-EQ filter by turning the Mode knob. Then press the Mode knob.

5 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display’s second line will now read TIMBRE

MATCH. To turn THX Timbre Match on or off, press the Mode knob. To adjust other THX filters, skip to step 6.

6 While the display’s top line reads TIMBRE MA TCH, you can activate (IS ACTIVE) or deactivate

(IS INACTIVE) the Timbre Match filter by turning the Mode knob. Then press the Mode knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display’s second line will now read

DECORRELATE. To turn THX Decorrelation on or off, press the Mode knob.

6 While the display’s top line reads DECORRELATE, you can activate (IS ACTIVE) or deactivate

(IS INACTIVE) the Decorrelation filter by turning the Mode knob. Then press the Mode knob to continue with other setup menu options. To completely exit the setup menu, turn any knob other than Mode.

Page 90

Dynamic Range

For all Dolby Digital (AC-3) and DTS Modes, you can opt to alter the setting for Dynamic Range, which when set to either DYNAMIC MID (Medium) or DYNAMIC MIN (Minimum), causes for some compression of the sound field. The Out of the Box setting for Dynamic Range is set to maximum (DYNAMIC MAX).

The ability to lower the Dynamic Range of these modes in essence, narrows the liveliness of the home theater system. The bangs and booms are not as boomy when selecting either the middle or minimum position. For some theaters, where the sound is too lively, selecting an alternate setting other than Maximum might prove worthwhile. To alter the Dynamic Range setting:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob. 2 The display’s second line will now read DYNAMIC RNGE and press the Mode knob. 3 Turn the Mode knob to select between DYNAMIC MAX, MID, or MIN. To continue with other

setup menu features, press the Mode knob. To completely exit the setup menu, turn any

knob other than the Mode knob.

Page 91

Default Modes

The Cinema Reference Mach II, while being among the most sophisticated of all home theater controllers, is also designed to be easy to use. As such, when properly setup, the end user need only select an input label without having to adjust any other parameters.

The Default Mode setup feature permits you to assign specific modes to an Input Label, such that, whenever that Input Label is selected, the appropriate mode is automatically recalled. This feature is extremely useful and most advanced. There are two Default Mode settings for each Input Label, one for Two-Channel source material and a second for non-Two-Channel source material (5.1).

As an example, since a DVD player can play both 5.1 and 2.0 DVDs, you may select a specific Cinema Mode for 5.1 playback and an alternate Two Channel mode for 2.0 playback.

Similarly, a CD player with a digital output is capable of playing both two-channel CDs and DTS 5.1 CDs. Here a musical T wo-Channel Mode can be set for CD playback while a Discrete or Direct mode might be selected for 5.1 playback.

Alternately , if you enjoy listening to CDs in either STEREO mode (front right, left, and subwoofer only) or QUAD mode (all speakers active), you can opt to create two Input Labels for the CD player. One might be called CD STEREO with the Two-Channel Default Mode set to STEREO while the other Input Label is called CD QUAD with the Default Mode set to QUAD. Here instead of changing modes when playing the CD’s Input Label, you would simply select the Input Label that will automatically engage the desired mode.

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box setup features the Default Modes as specified in the chart.

INPUT #

1 DVD PLAYER THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 2 DSS THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 3 DVR/PVR THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 4 VCR THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 5 CABLE/TV THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 6 CD PLAYER THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 7 TUNER THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 8 AUXILIARY THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

9 DVD AUDIO ---1 0 MULTI-ROOM THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 1 CAMCORDER THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 2 VIDEO GAME THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II VIRTUAL 1 3 COMPUTER DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE THX MUSIC PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 4 LASERDISC THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 5 LASER AC3 THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 6 PHONOGRPH THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 7 DSS RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 8 DVR RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 9 TV RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 2 0 CD RECORD THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

INPUT LABEL

NON-TWO CHANNEL (5.1)

DEFAULT MODE

TWO CHANNEL (2.0)

DEFAULT MODE

NON-TWO CHANNEL (5.1)

USER MODE

TWO CHANNEL (2.0)

USER MODE

To change Default Modes:

1 Turn the Input knob until the display’s second line reads the Input Label for the device whose

Default Mode you wish to alter. Then press the Input Knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads DEFAULT MODE and

press the Mode knob.

Page 92

4 The display’s second line will now read NON2 CHANNEL referring to non-Two Channel source

material (5.1). To alter the non-Two Channel Default Mode for this Input Label, press the Mode knob. To alter the Two-Channel Default Mode for this Input Label, skip to step 6.

5 Turn the Mode knob to select the desired non-T wo Channel Default Mode for this Input Label.

If you wish to have the Default Mode always engage the last mode used, you can select this option by turning the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads LAST USED. When done, press the Mode knob to continue with setting the Two-Channel Default Mode for this Input Label. To completely exit the setup menu, turn any knob other than the Mode knob.

6 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display’s second line reads 2 CHANNEL and

then press the Mode knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob to select the desired Two Channel Default Mode for this Input Label. If

you wish to have the Default Mode always engage the last mode used, you can select this option by turning the Mode knob counterclockwise until the display’s second line reads LAST USED. When done, press turn any knob other than the Mode knob to completely exit the setup menu.

8 Repeat steps 1-7 for all Input Labels whose Default Modes you wish to alter.

Page 93

User Modes

The Cinema Reference Mach II features special modes called User Modes. These are not additional modes that can be created using filter adjustments. Instead, User Modes represent an instantly selectable mode (one push from a remote control) that activates a specific Cinema Reference mode. As such, a single button on a control can be labeled User Mode, which when pressed, will activate a specific mode that is most preferred by the end user for that Input Label.

User Mode has two settings, one for the desired mode when playing a Two-Channel source and a second when playing a non-Two Channel source (5.1) and each Input Label has its own set of User Modes. Once these two modes are assigned to the User Mode setup feature, pressing the User Mode button will engage the set mode, depending on the type of material that is auto-detected by the Cinema Reference Mach II.

When setting the User Mode features, ADA suggests selecting modes that are not different from the Default Modes programmed. The reasoning is that since a Default Mode is automatically engaged based on the input label selected, the User Mode feature permits one to alter the playing mode easily . If the Default Mode and the User Mode are the same, then the User Mode feature provides no added value.

The Cinema Reference Mach II’s Out of the Box setup features the User Modes as specified in the chart.

INPUT #

1 DVD PLAYER THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

2 DSS THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

3 DVR/PVR THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

4 VCR THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

5 CABLE/TV THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

6 CD PLAYER THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

7 TUNER THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

8 AUXILIARY THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

9 DVD AUDIO ---1 0 MULTI-ROOM THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 1 CAMCORDER THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 2 VIDEO GAME THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II VIRTUAL 1 3 COMPUTER DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE THX MUSIC PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 4 LASERDISC THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 5 LASER AC3 THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 6 PHONOGRPH THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 7 DSS RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 8 DVR RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 9 TV RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 2 0 CD RECORD THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

INPUT LABEL

NON-TWO CHANNEL (5.1)

DEFAULT MODE

TWO CHANNEL (2.0)

DEFAULT MODE

NON-TWO CHANNEL (5.1)

USER MODE

TWO CHANNEL (2.0)

USER MODE

To change User Modes:

1 Turn the Input knob until the display’s second line reads the Input Label for the device whose

User Mode you wish to alter. Then press the Input Knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads USER MODES and press

the Mode knob.

4 The display’s second line will now read NON2 CHANNEL referring to non-Two Channel source

material (5.1). To alter the non-Two Channel Default Mode for this Input Label, press the Mode knob. To alter the Two-Channel User Mode for this Input Label, skip to step 6.

Page 94

5 Turn the Mode knob to select the desired non-Two Channel User Mode for this Input Label.

When done, press the Mode knob to continue with setting the Two-Channel User Mode for this Input Label. To completely exit the setup menu, turn any knob other than the Mode knob.

6 Turn the Mode knob clockwise one click until the display’s second line reads 2 CHANNEL and

then press the Mode knob.

7 Turn the Mode knob to select the desired Two Channel User Mode for this Input Label. When

done, press turn any knob other than the Mode knob to completely exit the setup menu.

8 Repeat steps 1-7 for all Input Labels whose User Modes you wish to alter.

Page 95

Appendix A - Out Of The Box Settings Overview

{4}{

}

{4}

Input Labels - AV Jacks - RGB Output - Low Voltage Triggers

The Cinema Reference does not defeat composite video, S-Video, or RGB input jacks from being assigned to each and every input label. Only the Component Video Input can be turned off per Input Label. As such, all Input Labels will have a composite video, S-Video, and RGB input jack assigned to them, even if that device does not output (or connect) in that manner to the Cinema Reference Mach II. If for example, your TV is set to the S-Video input and the Cinema Reference is on the CABLE/TV Input Label, you will see the image from the VCR (S-Video 4). This is because the CABLE/TV Input Label will still track the S-Video #4 input. To see the image from the CABLE/TV Input Label, you will need to set your TV to either a composite video input or, if applicable, the RGB input. The chart below shows Input Labels and illustrates in brackets {}, the assigned composite, S-Video, or RGB jack even though the Out of the Box setup is not relevant to these connections. Y ou can opt to alter these “blind” input links if for example, you prefer to have the DSS {2} image on screen instead of the VCR {4} image, when listening to the CD player.

INPUT #

1 DVD PLAYER DIGITAL 1 1111S-VIDEO ON ON 2 DSS OPTICAL 2 2222S-VIDEO ON ON 3 DVR/PVR ANALOG 3 3 3 OFF 3 S-VIDEO ON ON 4 VCR ANALOG 4 4 4 OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON ON 5 CABLE/TV ANALOG 5 5 {4} OFF 4 COMPOSITE ON ON 6 CD PLAYER ANALOG 6 { 4 } {4 } OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON OF F 7 TUNER ANALOG 7 { 4 } { 4 } OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON OF F 8 AUXILIARY ANALOG 8 8 { 4 } O F F { 4 } COMPOSITE O N ON

9 DVD AUDIO MULTI-PIN 1111COMPOSITE ON ON 1 0 MULTI-ROOM ANALOG 2 { 8 } {4 } OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON OF F 1 1 CAMCORDER ANALOG 1 7 { 4 } OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON ON 1 2 VIDEO GAME DIGITAL 3 6 {4} 3 { 4 } COMPOSITE O N ON 1 3 COMPUTER DIGITAL 4 {8} {4} OFF 1 RGB ON ON 1 4 LASERDISC OPTICAL 1 8 { 4 } OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON ON 1 5 LASER AC3 DIGITAL 2 8 { 4 } OFF { 4 } COMPOSITE ON ON 1 6 PHONOGRPH ANALOG 1 { 8 } { 4 } OFF {4 } COMPOSITE ON OF F 1 7 DSS RECORD ANALOG 2 2222COMPOSITE O N ON 1 8 DVR RECORD ANALOG 3 3 3 OFF 3 COMPOSITE O N ON 1 9 TV RECORD ANALOG 5 5 { 4 } O F F { 4 } COMPOSITE ON O N 2 0 CD RECORD ANALOG 6

INPUT LABEL

AUDIO

INPUT

COMPOSITE

VIDEO

INPUT

S-VIDEO

INPUT

4

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT

OFF

RGB (HV)

INPUT

HDTV

CONVERSIO

NOUTPUT

COMPOSITE O N OF F

DC LOW

VOLTAGE 1

DC LOW

VOLTAGE 2

Default Modes and User Modes per Input Label

INPUT #

1 DVD PLAYER THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 2 DSS THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 3 DVR/PVR THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 4 VCR THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 5 CABLE/TV THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 6 CD PLAYER THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 7 TUNER THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 8 AUXILIARY THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE

9 DVD AUDIO ---1 0 MULTI-ROOM THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 1 CAMCORDER THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 2 VIDEO GAME THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II VIRTUAL 1 3 COMPUTER DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE THX MUSIC PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 4 LASERDISC THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 5 LASER AC3 THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 6 PHONOGRPH THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC 1 7 DSS RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 8 DVR RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 1 9 TV RECORD THX +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE + THX DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MOVIE 2 0 CD RECORD THX MUSIC QUAD/HEX BYPASS DISCRETE +EX/ES PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

INPUT LABEL

NON-TWO CHANNEL (5.1)

DEFAULT MODE

TWO CHANNEL (2.0)

DEFAULT MODE

NON-TWO CHANNEL (5.1)

USER MODE

TWO CHANNEL (2.0)

USER MODE

Tone Presets

GROUP A SPEAKER GROUP A TREB A TREB A BASS A BASS A GROUP B SPEAKER GROUP B TREB B TREB B BASS B BASS B (X=SPKR ACTIVE) C S L R SL SR BL BR FREQ LEVEL FREQ LEVEL (X=SPKR ACTIVE) C S L R SL SR BL BR FREQ LEVEL FREQ LEVEL

TONE PRESET 1 XXXXXXXX 6KHZ 0DB 260HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 1 -------- 6KHZ 0DB 260HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 2 X-XX---- 12KHZ 0DB 120HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 2 ----XXXX 8KHZ 0DB 180HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 3 --XX---- 12KHZ 0DB 120HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 3 X- - - XXXX 8KHZ 0DB 180HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 4 X- XXXXXX 12KHZ 0DB 120HZ 0DB TONE PRESET 4 X- XXXXXX 8KHZ 0DB 180HZ 0DB

Page 96

Appendix B - Custom Setup Work Sheet

The work sheet below is provided for you to complete your own Custom Input Configuration. Please note that the numbers in the lower left hand corner of each box indicate the Out of the Box input assignment as a reference. Note that A1 refers to Analog 1, while D1 refers to Digital 1, and O1 refers to Optical 1. ADA recommends using a pencil to fill in this work sheet in the event you find yourself altering your configuration along the way.

INPUT

INPUT LABEL AUDIO INPUT

#

1 DVD PLAYER

2 DSS

3 DVR/PVR

4 VCR

5 CABLE/TV

6 CD PLAYER

7 TUNER

8 AUXILIARY

9 DVD AUDIO

1 0 MULTI-ROOM

COMPOSITE

VIDEO INPUT

D11111

O22222

A3 3 3 OFF 3

A4 4 4 OFF 4

A5 5 4 OFF 4

A6 4 4 OFF 4

A7 4 4 OFF 4

A8 8 4 OFF 4

MULTI-PIN 1111

A2 8 4 OFF 4

S-VIDEO INPUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO INPUT

RGB (HV)

INPUT

1 1 CAMCORDER

1 2 VIDEO GAME

1 3 COMPUTER

1 4 LASERDISC

1 5 LASER AC3

1 6 PHONOGRPH

1 7 DSS RECORD

1 8 DVR RECORD

1 9 TV RECORD

2 0 CD RECORD

A1 7 4 OFF 4

D36434

D4 8 4 OFF 1

O1 8 4 OFF 4

D2 8 4 OFF 4

A1 8 4 OFF 4

A22222

A3 3 3 OFF 3

A5 5 4 OFF 4

A6 4 4 OFF 4

Page 97

Appendix C - Resetting Factory Defaults

The Cinema Reference has a Factory Default recall options which will reset all Cinema Reference Mach II features to configurations programmed at the factory. Please note, that resetting your unit

to the Factory Default settings will void any changes that you may have made during the Cinema Reference Mach II’s setup.

To recall the Factory Default settings:

1 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads SETUP MENU and press

the Mode knob.

2 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads PRO SETUP and press the

Mode knob.

3 Turn the Mode knob clockwise until the display’s second line reads FACT ORY DFL T and press

the Mode knob.

4 The display’s second line will now read PUSH TO SET. If you are certain that you wish to

proceed with the resetting of the Factory Defaults, press the Mode knob now . The display’s second line will now read SYSTEM RESET. After a moment, the unit will cycle its power off and then back on.

At this time you have reset the Cinema Reference Mach II to the factory settings.

Page 98

Appendix D - Master Reset Power Button (Vacation Switch)

The Cinema Reference Mach II has a hidden front panel power button that permits you to remove power from the Cinema Reference without unplugging the Cinema Reference’s power cord. Because the Cinema Reference Mach II’s rear panel power cord may be difficult to access, this front panel power button is ideal when you wish to make certain the unit remains off during lengthy periods of nonuse (vacation switch), when you want to make certain the unit remains off (while performing sensitive connections), or when you need to reset the Cinema Reference Mach II (explained below).

The Cinema Reference Mach II operates on a microprocessor. Upon first getting power (plugging in the Cinema Reference’s AC cord), this microprocessor powers up and remains on, even if the Cinema Reference is off. The Cinema Reference’s microprocessor will remain on until the Cinema Reference’s power cord is disconnected or the hidden power button is pressed. While having the microprocessor constantly on, does not pose a problem for the Cinema Reference, outside events may require you to reset the microprocessor. These events might include electrical power outages or brownouts, power surges, lightning storms, etc. If you are experiencing problems operating your Cinema Reference, problems that you did not experience before, try turning this button off, wait a few minutes, and then turn the switch on again. If this does not solve your operational problems, please contact your local ADA Dealer.

Cinema Reference

ON

OFF

Master Reset Power Button

U

P

T

N

I

Please note, that if the Cinema Reference’s hidden front panel Master Power Button is in the (Out) off position, you will not be able to turn the Cinema Reference on from the front panel Volume Knob, an IR remote control, an ADA keypad, or a touch screen system. When this button is set to the off position, you must first push it in to the on position, prior to using the Cinema Reference.

ADA strongly recommends leaving this button on during normal dayto-day use. Unless, you are planning to not use the system for a long period of time, you will most likely leave this button in the on position.

SELECT SERIES

DVD DISC 1

ALL -24.0 DB

U

M

L

O

E

D

O

E

M

V

N

A

E

H

L

C

O

R

C

E

D

R

Cinema Reference MACH II

MADE IN U.S.A.

Page 99

Audio PTM-8150 User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

Safety Instructions & Electrical Warning

AC Connections

Power Amplifier (& Powered Subwoofer) Connections

Introduction - Front Panel Controls & Displays

Power On, Mute, Off, & Master Volume Control

Input Selector

Record Selector

Rear Panel Connections

Out of the Box Input Configuration

DVD Player Connection

DVD Audio/SACD Player Connection

HDTV DVD Player Connection

DSS Receiver Connection

TOS-Link Optical Interconnects & Audio Dropouts

DSS Receiver Connection - Coaxial Connection

DVR/PVR Connection

DVR/PVR with Digtial Audio & VGA Video Connection

VCR Connection

Cable or TV Tuner Connection

Digital or HDTV Cable/TV Tuner Connection

CD Player Connection

CD Player Digital Connections

Tuner (Radio) Connection

Auxiliary Component Connection

Multi-Room System Connection

Camcorder Connection

Video Game Connection

Computer Connection

Phonograph Connection

Laserdisc Player with Internal RF Demodulator

Laserdisc Player with only an AC-3 RF Output

Theater (Main) Video Connections

Recording Output

Custom Input Configuration

Final Input

Label Inputs

Audio Input Configuration

Composite Video Input Configuration

S-Video Input Configuration

Component Video Input Configuration

RGB/HDTV/VGA Input Configuration

HDTV Output Configuration

Auxiliary DC Triggers

Turn On Input

LCD Preview Display

Illumination

Speaker Size Setup 1

Subwoofer Crossover Point Setup

Multi-Pin Speaker Setup

Multi-Pin Input LFE Boost Switch

Speaker Level Setup 2

Balance Presets

Delay Level Setup 3

Bass Setup 4

Bass Limiter

THX Ultra Setup 5

Boundary Gain Control (BGC)

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

DTS LFE Settings

DTS LFE Adjustment Enable

DTS LFE Adjustment

Tone Controls

Tone Presets - Out of the Box

Recalling Tone Presets

Speaker Groups

Treble Group A

Bass Group A

Treble Group B

Bass Group B

Storing Tone Presets

Volume Setups

Storing Volume Presets

Recalling Volume Presets

Turn-On Volume Level Setup

Maximum Volume Level

Analog Gain